The Lighting HandbookYour concise reference book – always ready to hand. Chapter 1 Lighting technology and lighting application Chapter 2 Standard values for indoor and outdoor lighting Based on the new European standards Chapter 3 Products Chapter 4 Lamps and ballasts Chapter 5 Lighting and room management Chapter 6 Quickplan – calculating the n° of lum. required Chapter 7 Technical information Chapter 8 Checklists Chapter 9 Services Chapter 10 Notes Imprint: For questions and suggestions on the “The Lighting Handbook”: Zumtobel Lighting GmbH Schweizer Strasse 30 Postfach 72 6851 Dornbirn, AUSTRIA T +43/(0)5572/390-0 F +43/(0)5572/22 826 2nd edition, revised and updated, December 2008 The Lighting Handbook Chapter 1 Lighting technology and lighting application What is light? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic parameters used in lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luminous flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luminous intensity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luminance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traditional quality characteristics of lighting . . . . . . . . The right light – traditional and new quality criteria . Illuminance – definition of terminology . . . . . . . . . . Glare – glare limitation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Colour rendition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring illuminance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Humanergy Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comprehensive assessment of lighting quality (ELI) . . . Visual performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vista . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual comfort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vitality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Empowerment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculation of energy efficiency (LENI) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3 4–5 4 5 5 5 6–8 6 6–7 7 8 8 9 10 – 11 12 – 13 14 – 15 16 16 – 18 17 17 17 18 18 19 What is light? Light is that part of the electromagnetic spectrum that is perceived by our eyes. What is light? Wavelength [m] 10-10 Gamma rays X-rays Ultraviolet Visible light 10 -5 What does the human eye see? Relative spectral brightness perception 1.0 0.8 0.6 0.4 Infrared Microwaves 0.2 350 450 550 650 750 Wavelength [nm] Wavelength [m] Night Day 100 Television, VSW Medium wave 105 Radio waves By day we see in colour, while at night we can only see in shades of grey. The Lighting Handbook Light has a triple effect: – Light for visual functions – llumination of task area in conformity with relevant standards – glare-free and convenient – Light creating biological effects – Supporting people’s biological rhythms – Stimulating and motivating – Light for emotional perception – Pleasant lighting enhancing the interior design – Makes people relax and feel at ease The Lighting Handbook Chapter 1 / 3 . .Basic parameters used in lighting Luminous flux – Luminous intensity – Illuminance – Luminance Luminous flux I= E= Lumen [lm] Luminous intensity I Illuminance E Candela [lm/sr]=[cd] Luminance L L= Lux [lm/m2]=[lx] L= [lm/(sr*m2)]=[cd/m2] solid angle into which luminous flux is emitted area hit by luminous flux visible areas of light source reflectance of area 3.14 for diffuse surface areas Abbreviation: Unit: lm Phi Lumen 4 / Chapter 1 The Lighting Handbook Luminous flux The luminous flux describes the quantity of light emitted by a light source. The luminous efficiency is the ratio of the luminous flux to the electrical power consumed (lm/W). It is a measure of a lamp’s economic efficiency. Illuminance: E(lx) = luminous flux (lm) area (m2) Abbreviation: Unit: E lx Lux Luminance Luminance is the only basic lighting parameter that is perceived by the eye. The Lighting Handbook Abbreviation: Unit: L cd/m2 Chapter 1 / 5 . Abbreviation: Unit: cd Candela Illuminance Illuminance describes the quantity of luminous flux falling on a surface. Relevant standards specify the required illuminance (e. It is represented by the luminous intensity distribution curve (LDC).g. This is a useful measurement for directive lighting elements such as reflectors. EN 12464 “Lighting of indoor workplaces”).Luminous intensity The luminous intensity describes the quantity of light that is radiated in a particular direction. It specifies the brightness of a surface and is essentially dependent on its reflectance (finish and colour). It decreases by the square of the distance (inverse square law). vertical or inclined plane. Illuminance maintenance value Em: value that the illuminance level must not fall below in the visual task area.g. luminaires and room surfaces in the installation. 300 lx to 500 lx). Maintenance factor: the initial value multiplied by the maintenance factor gives the illuminance maintenance value. The visual task area may be a horizontal. The maintenance schedule (the cleaning and maintenance intervals for the lamps and installation) must be documented. Visual task area: illuminance levels are specified for specific visual tasks and are designed for the area in which these may take place. and can be determined on a case-by-case basis.Traditional quality characteristics of lighting The right light – traditional and new quality criteria T R A D I T I O N A L Harmonious brightness distribution Sufficient illumination level Glare limitation Avoidance of reflections Good modelling Correct light colour Appropriate colour rendition Quality criteria Changing lighting situations Personal control Energy efficiency Daylight integration Light as an interior design element N E W Illuminance – definition of terminology Each term corresponds to the new European standards (see Chapter 2 / 2). See also Chapter 8 / 22 on “Economic efficiency calculation”. then the whole room or a specific working area is used to define it. 6 / Chapter 1 The Lighting Handbook . The maintenance factor accounts for the reduction in luminous flux from lamps. If the precise location is not known. Area immediately surrounding the visual task area: here illuminance may be one level lower than in the visual task area (e. Relative illuminance (%) 150 125 100 75 50 25 maintenance value initial value operating time Maintenance value = maintenance factor x initial value Glare – glare limitation Direct glare Reflected glare – luminaires without glare control – very bright surfaces – loss of concentration – more frequent mistakes – fatigue The Lighting Handbook – reflective surfaces – incorrect luminaire arrangement – incorrect workstation position – loss of concentration – more frequent mistakes – fatigue – matching luminaire to workstation (layout) – indirect lighting – matt surfaces remedy – luminaires with limited luminance levels – blinds effect cause Chapter 1 / 7 . 000 K (nw) The Lighting Handbook 40 8 / Chapter 1 . tw = cool white The light colour sets the underlying mood of the room! Colour rendition Colour rendition index Ra ≥ 90 80–89 70–79 60–69 40–59 20–39 Daylight Incandescent lamp Compact fluorescent lamp Fluorescent lamp Mercury vapour highpressure lamp Metal halide lamp Sodium vapour highpressure lamp Application examples (minimum requirements for Ra): Ra ≥ 90: colour inspection Ra 80 –89: offices Ra 70 –79: electronics industry Ra 60– 69: assembly work Ra 40– 59: fabrication shop Ra 20– 39: warehouses Display format on fluorescent lamps Example 840: 8 Ra ≥ 80 Colour temperature 4.300 K 3.300 K reddish white blue-ish Association warm intermediate cool Ww = warm white.Light colour The light colour describes the colour appearance of the light. Colour temperature Appearance ww nw tw up to 3.300 K – 5.300 K above 5. nw = intermediate. 2 m – measuring grid: congruent triangles. tolerance 5% – B: average precision. tolerance 3% – A: high precision.03 m – circulation areas.5 m 1. Measuring instruments: description and precision – L: maximum precision. burnt-in lamps (discharge lamps 100 h) Measuring grid and measuring level – workplaces = 0. sports facilities (floor) = 0.75 m.0 m The Lighting Handbook Chapter 1 / 9 .03 m – cylindrical illuminance = 1. stairs.Measuring illuminance Mean illuminance is the arithmetic mean of the point brilliance levels measured with a luxmeter in a defined grid. under precisely specified conditions.2 m 0. tolerance 10% (minimum requirement) Measuring conditions – avoid external light/daylight (measure separately and subtract) – check mains voltage and ambient temperature – use new.0 m 5. car parks (floor) = 0. 1 m distance – measuring grid not congruent with arrangement grid Size of measuring field 1m 5m 10 m 50 m 100 m Grid element spacing 0. approx.0 m 3. EN 12464. that must not be exceeded: ≤ 16 ≤ 19 ≤ 22 ≤ 25 ≤ 28 Technical drawing Reading. which is based on a formula for glare. foyers 10 / Chapter 1 The Lighting Handbook . It takes account of all the luminaires in a system contributing to the sensation of glare. It produces a UGR index.25 Lb (1) ( L2 P2 (2) ) The UGR method takes account of all the luminaires in the system that contribute to the glare sensation (2) as well as the brightness of walls and ceilings (1).Lighting technology Under the new European standard for interior workplace lighting. The two methods – the one set out in DIN 5035 and the one defined in EN 12464 – produce comparable results. The Quickplan tables in Chapter 6 and the lighting catalogues contain reference values for specific room sizes. UGR = 8 log 0. (psychological) glare is assessed by the unified glare rating method (UGR). writing. UGR tables derived from this formula are provided by the manufacturers for glare rating. UGR limits (UGRL). meetings. training. computer-based work Craft and light industries Heavy industry Railway platforms. Quality class for nominal illuminance (lx) 1000 750 500 <300 A 1 2000 1500 1000 750 500 <300 2 2000 1000 500 <300 3 2000 1000 500 <300 25 28 22 8 6 4 3 2 a hs 1 55° A 13 UGRL 85° 75° 65° = 45° The Lighting Handbook The previously used luminance limiting curve method defined in DIN 5035 assesses the mean luminance of the luminaires across a beam angle of 45° to 85°. Chapter 1 / 11 = 85° 45° 8 103 2 3 4 5 6 8 104 2 Luminance L in cd/m2 16 19 3 4 . The new European standard sets UGR = 19 as the maximum permissible value for offices. which is equivalent to the luminance limiting curve for 500 lx in Quality class 1. Types of lighting Direct lighting: – highly directional – strong glare reduction at certain angles – dark ceiling (cave effect) – limited flexibility of workstation layout – energy-efficient Indirect lighting: – diffuse lighting conditions – room gains in height – glare-free – workstations can be positioned anywhere – low energy efficiency 12 / Chapter 1 The Lighting Handbook . Indirect/direct lighting: – pleasant room impression – high user acceptance – good contrast ratios – flexible workstation layout (indirect component > 60 %) Mellow Light: – indirect/direct solution for low ceiling heights – workstations can be positioned anywhere – glare-free – reduced luminance levels at all viewing angles – gives impression of daylight in room The Lighting Handbook Chapter 1 / 13 . control of glare and reflections. for instance by exciting lighting accents. The quantity and quality of light can now be specified exactly for any task area (see Chapter 2 / 2). Optimum energy efficiency Large buildings provide huge potential for optimisation of energy consumption. as provided for in the EN 12464 standard.Lighting concepts The definition of individual visual tasks for the purpose of lighting design in a room. Visual function TASK AREA lighting concepts provide the right quantity of light of the best possible quality for every visual task. TASK AREA lighting concepts are a customised tool to fully exploit the additional options provided. Savings can be further increased by using daylight-based lighting management and presence detectors. good contrast rendition and shadow detail are consistently matched to the respective task. Emotional and biological effects Focusing the lighting onto clearly defined areas means saving investment and operating costs. opens up new perspectives for lighting design. The funds saved can be used to improve comfort and enhance the room atmosphere. illuminated walls or dynamic lighting scenarios. 14 / Chapter 1 The Lighting Handbook . At the same time they offer financial scope that can be used to improve lighting comfort and enhance the room effect. Uniformity. Lighting that is consistently focussed onto individual task areas reduces mean illuminance levels and therefore the average expenditure on energy. The lighting is not based on the room but perfectly adjusted to people’s needs. rooms can be designed to be much more open and attractive. for instance. By illuminating walls.Room-related lighting concepts take neither individual task areas nor different visual tasks into account. dynamic lighting situations can enhance their visual quality. They are based on the most demanding task performed in the room. the entire room disposes of a uniform lighting quality. Chapter 1 / 15 . The Lighting Handbook Lighting focussed onto individual visual task areas provides for varied light design in the room. The position of the workstation is not defined. Checklists are used to record the individual criteria.Humanergy Balance Human aspects + energy efficiency = Humanergy Balance The Humanergy Balance concept harmonises both aspects of lighting and makes it possible to assess them: ELI. the energy efficiency indicator. the lighting quality indicator. Comprehensive assessment of lighting quality (ELI) The Ergonomic Lighting Indicator (ELI) allows to assess lighting quality in terms of quantity. The outermost line in the graph indicates optimum fulfilment of a criterion. assesses the economic and ecological aspects of light. LENI. which are displayed in a Kiviat graph (spider chart). using five descriptive quality criteria. 16 / Chapter 1 The Lighting Handbook . takes their physical and psychological effects on people into account. Visual performance A E Empowerment B Vista D Vitality C Visual comfort Example of ELI assessment using a spider chart. – Lighting level – Uniformity of illuminance – Colour rendition – Avoiding hard shadows – Contrast rendition – Physiological glare Vista In prestigious buildings. for example. – Architectural design – Mental design – Guidance – Hierarchy of perception – External appearance – Material – Luminaires’ protection type – Protection against harmful radiation Visual comfort Light is not only needed in the visual task area.Visual performance Lighting in conformity with relevant standards is decisive for ensuring that a visual task can be identified and the related activities can be carried out. but also for perception in the room. Rooms should be illuminated with uniform brightness and lighting balance. Consideration of the traditional quality characteristics of lighting has a major impact on visual task performance. light is not only needed for seeing but also enhances the looks of the interior. Light can provide guidance and make people accept the interior on account of the first visual impression they get. – Balanced brightness distribution – Varying luminance levels – Plasticity/modelling – Discomfort glare – Uniform illuminance in area around visual task – Sense of security – Artificial light complemented by daylight – Use of flicker-free ballasts The Lighting Handbook Chapter 1 / 17 . – Individual influence by switching and dimming – Choice of lighting scene – Presence detection – Daylight-based control – Choice of lighting scenarios – Flexibility for layout changes – Privacy Use of the charts is described in Chapter 8 / 3–10 “Checklists”. – Sense of well-being – Activation and stimulation – Circadian rhythm – Lighting similar to daylight – Avoiding danger spots – Avoiding thermal radiation – Electromagnetic fields Empowerment Varying visual requirements. Moreover. it has a positive impact on their health and may even enhance or influence biological processes.Vitality Light significantly influences people’s activity and sense of wellbeing. Sensors and control systems help users adjust the lighting situation to their personal needs. 18 / Chapter 1 The Lighting Handbook . visual tasks or periods of use call for options to individually influence one’s lighting situation. the following relevant factors are identified: LENI = – the installed load (Pn) – multiplied by the annual hours of use by day (tD) and at night (tN) – reduced by factors ( 1) for daylight-based control (FD). The following factors have a positive impact on the reduction of energy consumption: – Sensible control of lighting – Use of daylight – Use of presence detectors – Intelligent consideration of hours of use – Energy-efficient lamps – Need-based use of luminaires and lighting solutions. presence-based control (FO) and use of a lighting control system (FC) – the area assessed (A) LENI also takes charging energy for emergency lighting and standby energy into account. Formula for calculating a lighting installation’s energy consumption: { (Pn x FC) x {(tD x FO x FD) + (tN x FO)} kWh/(year x m2) A Without elaborating on individual parameters in greater detail.Calculation of energy efficiency (LENI) The Lighting Energy Numeric Indicator (LENI) stands for a lighting installation’s actual energy consumption in kWh per square metre and year. LENI is calculated according to the normative specifications of the EN 15193 standard. specified for the respective application – Constant lighting control (maintenance control) 60 The Lighting Handbook 120 0 Energy consumption in kWh/(m2 year) 180 Chapter 1 / 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General circulation areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gas and heat plants . . . Traffic zones and general areas inside buildings . Transportational areas . . . . . . electricity. . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3 – 12 3 3–7 7 8 8 8–9 9 – 10 11 11 – 12 13 – 15 13 13 13 13 13 14 14 14 14 – 15 15 . . . . . . . . . . . Railway and tramways . . . . Fuel filling service stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saw mills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor workplaces. . Educational premises. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 2 Standard values for indoor and outdoor lighting Standard values for lighting of indoor and outdoor workplaces and sports facility lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building sites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offices . . . . . . Retail premises . . Outdoor workplaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power. . . . . . . Industrial activities and crafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sports facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Industrial sites and storage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . Petrochemical and other hazardous industries. . . . Health care premises . . . . . . . . . . . . Places of public assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airports . 67 in a clean atmosphere. DIN 5035.00 m The maintenance factors can be determined on a case-by-case basis from the manufacturer’s data (see also Chapter 8). Swiss lighting standard SLG 8912. EN 12464-2 (October 2007) “Sports facility lighting”. The maintenance factors and schedules for Zumtobel luminaires are given in the Quickplan tables (Chapter 6). EN 12464 specifies that the lighting designer must document the maintenance factor and maintenance schedule. Example for an office task area: task height = 0. The Ra of the selected lamp must be equal to or greater than this value. and 0.Standard values for lighting of indoor and outdoor workplaces and sports facility lighting Em gives the illuminance maintenance values specified in the European standards which partially or completely replace national standards (e. Where no individual maintenance data is available. EN 12193 (April 2008) (see also “Definition of terminology”.g. “Lighting of indoor workplaces”. DIN 67526). the following values are recommended as reference maintenance factors for modern technology and three-yearly maintenance: 0. Chapter 1 / 6) Illuminance levels must not fall below the Em maintenance values in the visual task area.50 in very dirty environments. If the precise location is not known. Ra is the lower limit for the colour rendition index. EN 12464-1 (April 2003) “Lighting of outdoorwork places”.75 m area use r flo or-a rea 1. Austrian standard O 1040. The Lighting Handbook . UGRL is the upper limit for direct glare. the limit should be applied to the whole room or a specific working area. The UGR value calculated in the design process must lie below this (the Quickplan tables give the UGR figure for the luminaire used in a medium-size reference room). Type of interior. decorating Cement. engraving. toilets • Sick bay • Rooms for medical attention Control rooms • Plant rooms. utensil washing Bakeries • Preparation and baking • Finishing. glassware • Drying • Preparation. travolators • Loading ramps/bays Rest. glazing. post room. pantries • Rest rooms • Rooms for physical exercise • Cloakrooms. glazing. work on kilns and mixers • General machine work • Rough forms Ceramics. task or activity Em UGRL Ra Traffic zones and general areas inside buildings Traffic zones • Circulation areas and corridors • Stairs. tiles. cement goods. calving stalls • Feed preparation. sanitation and first aid rooms • Canteens. pressing. bricks • Drying • Preparation of materials. washrooms. shaping simple parts. bathrooms. rolling. concrete. glass. dairy. shaping precision parts. glass blowing • Grinding. cold stores • Store and stockrooms • Dispatch packing handling areas Storage rack areas • Gangways: unmanned • Gangways: manned • Control stations 100 150 150 200 100 300 200 500 500 200 500 100 300 20 150 150 28 25 25 22 22 22 25 19 16 25 19 25 25 – 22 22 40 40 40 80 80 80 80 80 90 60 80 60 60 40 60 60 Industrial activities and crafts Agriculture • Loading and operating of goods. switch gear rooms • Telex. general machine work • Enamelling. handling equipment and machinery • Buildings for livestock • Sick animal pens. manufacture of glass instruments 200 50 200 200 300 500 50 200 300 300 50 300 300 750 25 – 25 25 22 22 28 28 25 25 28 25 25 19 80 40 80 80 80 80 20 40 80 80 20 80 80 80 The Lighting Handbook Chapter 2 / 3 . switchboard Store rooms. glass polishing. escalators. on filtering floor in sugar refineries • Cutting and sorting of fruit and vegetables • Manufacture of delicatessen foods. switchboards – fine e. measuring equipment • Electronic workshops. adjusting Food stuffs and luxury food industry • Work places and zones in – breweries. telephones – precision e. hand painting • Manufacture of synthetic precious stones Chemical. fermentation cellar • Sorting and washing of products. sieving.g. malting floor – for washing. large transformers – medium e. testing.g. kitchen work. plastics and rubber industry • Remote-operated processing installations • Processing installations with limited manual intervention • Constantly manned work places in processing installations • Precision measuring rooms. mixing. dairies mills. peeling – cooking in preserve and chocolate factories – work places and zones in sugar factories – for drying and fermenting raw tobacco. packing • Work places and critical zones in slaughter houses. crystal.g.g. hand grinding and engraving • Precision work e. milling. task or activity • Grinding of optical glass. finishing.Type of interior. butchers. decorative grinding. cleaning. inspection Electrical industry • Cable and wire manufacture • Winding: – large coils – medium-sized coils – small coils • Coil impregnating • Galvanising • Assembly work: – rough e. laboratories • Pharmaceutical production • Tyre production • Colour inspection • Cutting. manufacture of cigars and cigarettes Em UGRL Ra 750 1000 1500 50 150 300 500 500 500 1000 750 300 300 500 750 300 300 300 500 750 1000 1500 16 16 16 – 28 25 19 22 22 16 19 25 25 22 19 25 25 25 22 19 16 16 80 90 90 20 40 80 80 80 80 90 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 200 300 500 300 500 25 25 25 25 22 80 80 80 80 80 4 / Chapter 2 The Lighting Handbook .g. barrel filling. trimming. punching • Sorting • Leather dyeing (machine) • Quality control • Colour inspection • Shoe making • Glove making Metal working and processing • Open die forging • Drop forging • Welding • Rough and average machining: tolerances ≥ 0. sewing. marking and sorting • Washing and dry cleaning • Ironing. task or activity • Inspection of glasses and bottles. barrels. cutting. rubbing. etc. shaping. shoe manufacture: stitching. pressing • Inspection and repairs Leather and leather goods • Work on vats. product control.1 mm • Precision machining. cellars.Type of interior.1 mm • Scribing. polishing. • Platforms • Sand preparation • Dressing room • Work places at cupola and mixer • Casting bay • Shake out areas • Machine moulding • Hand and core moulding • Die casting • Model building Hairdressers • Hairdressing Jewellery manufacturing • Working with precious stones • Manufacture of jewellery • Watch making (manual) • Watch making (automatic) Laundries and dry cleaning • Goods in. sorting. tumbling of skins • Saddlery work. decoration • Laboratories • Colour inspection Foundries and metal casting • Man-size underfloor tunnels. inspection Em UGRL Ra 500 500 1000 50 100 200 200 200 200 200 200 300 300 500 500 1500 1000 1500 500 300 300 300 750 200 300 500 500 500 1000 1000 500 500 200 300 300 300 500 750 22 19 16 – 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 22 19 16 16 16 19 25 25 25 19 25 25 22 22 22 19 16 22 22 25 25 25 22 19 19 80 80 90 20 40 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 90 90 90 80 80 80 80 80 80 40 80 80 90 80 80 90 80 80 60 60 60 60 60 60 The Lighting Handbook Chapter 2 / 5 . skiving. pits • Fleshing. grinding: tolerances < 0. Type of interior. belt sections.. lithography 1000 • Colour inspection in multicoloured printing 1500 • Steel and copper engraving 2000 Rolling mills. embossing. e. folding. pulp mills 200 • Paper manufacture and processing. 50 19 19 19 16 16 – 28 25 – 25 25 22 22 80 80 80 90 80 20 40 80 20 20 40 80 80 . condenser rooms etc.g. control panels 300 • Test. shear line 300 • Control platforms.g. coiler. gilding. e. printing machines. sewing 500 Power stations • Fuel supply plant 50 • Boiler house 100 • Machine halls 200 • Side rooms. sorting. paper and corrugating machines. cutting. cardboard manufacture 300 • Standard bookbinding work. switchboards (inside buildings) 200 • Control rooms 500 • Outdoor switch gear 20 Printers • Cutting. cold forming 300 • Plate machining: thickness ≥ 5 mm 200 • Sheet metalwork: thickness < 5 mm 300 • Tool making. precision mechanics. measurement and inspection 500 • Underfloor man-sized tunnels. template and jig making. retouching. cellars etc. gluing. pump rooms. iron and steel works • Production plants without manual operation 50 • Production plants with occasional manual operation 150 • Production plants with continuous manual operation 200 • Slab Store 50 • Furnaces 200 • Mill train. matrix making 500 • Paper sorting and hand printing 500 • Type setting. embossing. task or activity Em UGRL 25 25 22 19 25 25 22 19 25 25 19 25 25 22 – 28 25 25 16 – Ra 60 60 60 60 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 20 40 80 60 80 20 – 20 6 / Chapter 2 The Lighting Handbook • Wire and pipe drawing shops. work on stones and platens. block engraving. micromechanics 1000 Paper and paper goods • Edge runners. cutting equipment manufacture 750 • Assembly: – rough 200 – medium 300 – fine 500 – precision 750 • Galvanising 300 • Surface preparation and painting 750 • Tool. bale opening 200 • Carding.g. cutting. reeling. sinking 500 • Selection of veneer woods 750 • Marquetry. painting. sizing. fluting. card cutting. jute and hemp spinning 300 • Spinning. grooving. drawing patterns 750 • Finishing.Type of interior. inlay work 750 • Quality control. fine knitting. rebating. assembly 300 • Polishing. turning. drawing. combing. polishing chamber 750 • Painting: touch-up. dressing. etc. typing. task or activity Em UGRL Ra Textile manufacture and processing • Work places and zones in baths. pre-spinning. drying.g. washing. copying. sawing. inspection 1000 • Upholstery manufacture (manned) 1000 • Final inspection 1000 Wood working and processing • Automatic processing e. trimming 1000 • Colour inspection. data processing • Technical drawing • CAD work stations • Conference and meeting rooms • Reception desk • Archives 300 500 750 500 500 300 200 19 19 16 19 19 22 25 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 The Lighting Handbook Chapter 2 / 7 . spraying chamber. braiding. winding 500 • Warping. plywood manufacturing 50 • Steam pits 150 • Saw frame 300 • Work at joiner’s bench. fabric control 1000 • Invisible mending 1500 • Hat manufacturing 500 Vehicle construction • Body work and assembly 500 • Painting. dyeing 500 • Drying room 100 • Automatic fabric printing 500 • Burling. gluing. reading. • Writing. fancy joinery 750 • Work on wood working machines e. weaving. picking. inspection 1000 25 22 22 22 22 22 22 28 25 19 16 19 22 22 22 19 19 19 60 80 80 80 80 90 80 60 80 80 90 90 80 80 80 90 80 80 28 28 25 25 22 19 22 22 19 40 40 60 80 80 80 90 90 90 Offices Offices • Filing. taking up stitches 750 • Manual design. knitting 500 • Sewing. ironing. devilling machine work. plying. task or activity Em UGRL Ra Retail premises Retail premises • Sales area • Till area • Wrapper table 300 500 500 22 19 19 80 80 80 Places of public assembly General areas • Entrance halls • Cloakrooms • Lounges • Ticket offices Restaurants and hotels • Reception/cashier desk. dressing rooms Trade fairs. exhibition halls • General lighting Museums • Exhibits. dining room. porters desk • Kitchen • Restaurant. play school • Play room • Nursery • Handicraft room Educational buildings • Classrooms. cinemas • Practice rooms. tutorial rooms • Classroom for evening classes and adults education 300 300 300 300 500 19 19 19 19 19 80 80 80 80 80 The Lighting Handbook 8 / Chapter 2 . insensitive to light • Light sensitive exhibits Libraries • Bookshelves • Reading area • Counters Public car parks (indoor) • In/out ramps (during the day) • In/out ramps (at night) • Traffic lanes • Parking areas • Ticket office 100 200 200 300 300 500 – 200 300 500 100 300 300 22 25 22 22 22 22 – 22 22 19 25 22 22 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 according to requirements 200 500 500 300 75 75 75 300 19 19 19 25 25 25 – 19 80 80 80 20 20 20 20 80 Educational premises Nursery school. concert halls.Type of interior. function room • Self-service restaurant • Buffet • Conference rooms • Corridors Theatres. gymnasiums. maternity wards • General lighting • Reading lighting • Simple examinations • Examination and treatment • Night lighting. observation lighting • Bathrooms and toilets for patients Examination rooms (general) • General lighting • Examination and treatment Eye examination rooms • General lighting • Examination of the outer eye 200 200 50 200 500 300 100 300 300 1000 5 200 500 1000 300 1000 22 22 22 22 19 19 19 19 19 19 – 22 19 19 19 – 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 90 80 80 90 90 80 90 The Lighting Handbook Chapter 2 / 9 . corridors • Stairs • Student common rooms and assembly halls • Teachers rooms • Library: bookshelves • Library: reading areas • Stock rooms for teaching materials • Sports halls. swimming pools (general use) • School canteens • Kitchen Em 500 500 500 500 750 750 500 500 500 300 300 300 500 200 100 150 200 300 200 500 100 300 200 500 UGRL 19 19 19 19 19 16 19 19 19 19 19 19 22 22 25 25 22 19 19 19 25 22 22 22 Ra 80 80 80 80 90 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 Health care premises Rooms for general use • Waiting rooms • Corridors: during the day • Corridors: during the night • Day rooms Staff rooms • Staff office • Staff rooms Wards.Type of interior. task or activity • Lecture hall • Black board • Demonstration table • Art rooms • Art rooms in art schools • Technical drawing rooms • Practical rooms and laboratories • Handicraft rooms • Teaching workshop • Music practice rooms • Computer practice rooms (menu driven) • Language laboratory • Preparation rooms and workshops • Entrance halls • Circulation areas. task or activity • Reading and colour vision tests with vision charts Ear examination rooms • General lighting • Ear examination Scanner rooms • General lighting • Scanners with image enhancers and television systems Delivery rooms • General lighting • Examination and treatment Treatment rooms (general) • Dialysis • Dermatology • Endoscopy rooms • Plaster rooms • Medical baths • Massage and radiotherapy Operating areas • Pre-op and recovery rooms • Operating theatre • Operating cavity Intensive care unit • General lighting • Simple examinations • Examination and treatment • Night watch Dentists • General lighting • At the patient • Operating cavity • White teeth matching Laboratories and pharmacies • General lighting • Colour inspection Decontamination rooms • Sterilisation rooms • Disinfection rooms Autopsy rooms and mortuaries • General lighting • Autopsy table and dissecting table Em UGRL Ra 500 300 1000 300 50 300 1000 500 500 300 500 300 300 500 1000 16 19 – 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 90 80 90 80 80 80 80 80 90 80 80 80 80 90 90 100 300 1000 20 500 1000 5000 5000 500 1000 300 300 500 5000 19 19 19 19 19 – – – 19 19 22 22 19 – 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 80 90 80 80 90 90 The Lighting Handbook 10 / Chapter 2 .Type of interior. usually an UGRL level of 22 should be observed • Aerobics 500 • Archery 200 • Athletics (all disciplines) 500 • Badminton 750 • Basketball 750 • Billards 750 • Boccia 300 • Boules 300 • Bowling 200 • Bowls 500 • Boxing (competition/training) 2000/300 • Climbing 500 • Cricket 750 • Cricket nets 1500 • Curling (target/playing area) 300/200 • Cycling 750 • Dancing (fitness) 500 • Darts 200 The Lighting Handbook 60 60 60 60 60 80 60 60 60 60 80 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 Chapter 2 / 11 . baggage claim areas • Connecting areas. escalators. check-in desks • Customs and passport control desks • Waiting areas • Luggage store rooms • Security check areas • Air traffic control tower • Testing and repair hangars • Engine test areas • Measuring areas in hangars Railway installations • Covered platforms and passenger subways (underpasses) • Ticket hall and concourse • Ticket and luggage offices and counters • Waiting rooms 200 150 500 500 200 200 300 500 500 500 500 22 22 19 19 22 25 19 16 22 22 22 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 50 200 300 200 28 28 19 22 40 40 80 80 Sports facilities The following details apply to competition class I (lower requirements apply to classes II and III) Em and Ra data according to European Standard EN 12193 General school sports data from EN 12464 An Ra level of 80 should be preferred For lighting for training purposes. travolators • Information desks. task or activity Em UGRL Ra Transportational areas Airports • Arrival and departure halls.Type of interior. Type of interior. task or activity • Fencing • Football (indoor) • Gymnastics • Handball • Hockey • Ice hockey • Ice skating • Judo • Kendo/Karate • Netball • Petanque • Racketball • Riding • Roller skating • School sports • Shooting • Snooker • Speed skating • Squash • Swimming • Swimmung (school level) • Table tennis • Tennis • Volleyball • Weight lifting • Wrestling Em 750 750 500 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 300 750 500 500 750 200 750 500 750 300 500 750 750 750 750 750 Ra 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 80 60 60 80 60 60 60 60 60 60 12 / Chapter 2 The Lighting Handbook . g. lifting and descending location for cranes. cities) • Air pressure and water checking points and other service areas • Meter reading area Industrial sites and storage areas • Short term handling of large units and raw materials. (10 km/h).e. open loading platforms • Reading of addresses. vehicle turning. bicycles. covered loading platforms. loading and unloading of freight. e. light reinforcement work. ordinary reinforcement and casting tasks in concrete plants • Demanding electrical.Type of area. electric piping and cabling • Element jointing. loading and unloading of solid bulk goods • Continuous handling of large units and raw materials. excavation and loading • Construction areas.e. rural areas and suburbs) • Entry and exit driveways: light environment (i. drain pipes mounting. loading and unloading points 5 10 20 50 20 30 50 50 200 20 50 100 200 5 20 50 150 150 20 20 20 20 20 40 40 40 60 20 20 40 40 20 20 20 20 20 Airports • Hangar apron • Terminal apron • Loading areas • Fuel depot • Aircraft maintenance stands Building sites • Clearance. machine and piping installations. use of tools. transport. trucks and excavators • Regular vehicle traffic (max. wooden mould and framework mounting. task or activity Em UGRL Ra General circulation areas at outdoor workplaces • Walkways exclusively for pedestrians • Traffic areas for slowly moving vehicles max. machine and pipe mountings Fuel filling stations • Vehicle parking and storage areas • Entry and exit driveways: dark environment (i. inspection 20 50 100 200 20 20 20 60 The Lighting Handbook Chapter 2 / 13 . demanding electrical. 40 km/h) • Pedestrian passages. auxiliary and storage tasks • Framework element mounting. utilisation of manually regulated valves. parking areas of shops. retarder and classification yards 10 • Hump areas 10 • Freight track. gas and heat plants • Pedestrian movements within electrically safe areas • Handling of servicing tools. miniature rails. coal • Overall inspection • General servicing work and reading of instruments • Wind tunnels: servicing and maintenance • Repair of electric devices Railways and tramways Railway areas including light railways. including stabling 10 • Railway yards: flat marshalling. electricity. monorails. etc. inspection of leakage. terraced and apartment houses. piping and packing • Filling and emptying of container trucks and wagons with dangerous substances. task or activity Em Ra Parking areas • Light traffic. short duration operations 10 • Open platforms. e. parking areas of department stores. replacements of pump packing. major sports and multipurpose building complexes 5 10 50 20 20 20 Petrochemical and other hazardous industries • Handling of servicing tools. suburban and regional trains with large number of passengers or inter-city services with small number of passengers 20 • Freight track. reading of instruments • Fuel loading and unloading sites • Repair of machines and electric devices 20 50 100 100 200 5 20 50 100 100 200 20 20 40 20 60 20 20 20 40 40 60 Power. churches. e. continuous operation 20 • Open platforms in freight areas 20 • Servicing trains and locomotives 20 • Railway yards handling areas 30 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 40 20 14 / Chapter 2 The Lighting Handbook . sports and multipurpose building complexes • Heavy traffic.Type of area. office buildings. metro.g. cycle parks • Medium traffic. general service work. starting and stopping motors.g. rural and local trains. tramways. • Tracks in passenger station areas. plants. small number of passengers 15 • Walkways 20 • Level crossings 20 • Open platforms. e.g. parking areas of schools. major shopping centres. lighting of burners • Filling and emptying of container trucks and wagons with risk free substances. Type of area.on-norm. sawdust and chip conveyors • Sorting of timber on land or in water. inter-city services • Stairs. suburban or regional trains or inter-city services with small number of passengers • Covered platforms in freight areas. task or activity • Coupling area • Stairs. inter-city services • Covered platforms. continuous operation • Inspection pit Em 30 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 Ra 20 40 20 40 20 40 40 40 40 Saw mills • Timber handling on land and in water. timber unloading points and sawn timber loading points. small and medium-size stations • Open platforms. as well as research on the subject at www. A-1020 Vienna. stacking • Reading of addresses and markings of sawn timber • Grading and packaging • Feeding into stripping and chopping machines 20 50 100 200 300 20 20 40 40 40 Extracts from Austrian Standard (ÖNORM) EN 12464-1 Light and lighting – lighting of workplaces – Part 1: indoor workplaces (2003-04-01) Austrian Standard (ÖNORM) EN 12464-2 Light and lighting – lighting of workplaces – Part 2: outdoor workplaces (2007-10-01) Austrian Standard (ÖNORM EN 12193) Light and lighting – sports facility lighting (2008-04-01) The Lighting Handbook published with permission by the Austrian Standards Institute. large stations • Covered platforms in freight areas. short duration operations • Covered platforms. mechanical lifting to timber conveyor.at Chapter 2 / 15 . Heinestrasse 38 Ordering of standards and products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spots and tracks (SOLAR II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ORILED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HELISSA. . . . . SYSTEMLED . . CLARIS II . . . . . ONLITE/ONLITE RESCLITE . . . . . . . . . . . . STARFLEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIVO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZBOX . . . CIELOS. . . . . . . . . . . . Free-standing uplights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TETTOIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIRAL T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RTX II . . . . . . BELIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VAERO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECTON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MELLOW LIGHT IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SOLINA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCUBA . . . . LED luminaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS L and H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FREELINE . . . . . . . . . VIVO-S + VIVO-SL) . . . . . . . . . . . 2LIGHT. . . . . . . LIGHTTOOLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 3 Products (selection) ZUMTOBEL applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS M/MWW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIGHT FIELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PASO II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS S and Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5 6–9 10 – 11 12 – 13 14 – 17 18 – 23 24 – 25 26 27 – 28 29 30 – 31 32 – 33 34 – 35 36 – 37 38 – 39 40 – 41 42 – 43 44 – 45 46 – 47 48 – 49 50 – 57 58 – 59 60 – 61 62 – 63 64 – 67 68 – 69 70 – 71 72 – 73 74 – 75 76 – 77 78 – 85 86 – 87 88 – 89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PERLUCE . . . . CARDAN-SPIRIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . zumtobel. flexible architecture and flexible light which enhances communication and motivation and improves the quality of working and spending time at the office. The right light in manufacturing and assembly bays as well as warehouses and workshops is the basis for any productive work. functionality and building management system of industrial buildings. ZUMTOBEL is the competent reliable partner for innovative lighting solutions in all areas of application of professional interior lighting – providing global competence.Areas of application Throughout the world.com/applications Chapter 3 / 3 The Lighting Handbook . www. What is required are flexible people. the greatest demands are placed on the flexibility. Offices and Communication Spatial structures and lighting systems must be adapted to new types of work. Education and Science Using light to enhance communication. Industry and Engineering In production. superior product quality and futureproof technologies. improve awareness and create social understanding: dynamic lighting solutions with optimum colour properties enhance people’s concentration and improve visual comfort in educational facilities. their design becomes an expression of the brand message. sanatoriums and retirement homes. Art and Culture Where the highest architectural requirements must be met.zumtobel.com/applications The Lighting Handbook . accentuating factor of experience.Presentation and Retail Modern retail worlds must provide a quality of experience. 4 / Chapter 3 www. Customised lighting solutions are an essential element of these worlds of experience. The guests’ pleasure starts with the lighting that stimulates all senses. Health and Care Light increases the patients’ sense of wellbeing. makes orientation easier and ensures safety in circulation areas – in hospitals. ever greater demands are also made on the element without which room impression and artistic delight are inconceivable: light as a modulating. supports the accomplishment of visual tasks in different therapies and examination procedures. creates a living-room ambience. Hotel and Wellness Those who collect stars for their restaurant or hotel should not only work on their recipes. Orientation and Safety Lighting provides safety and ensures (self-)reliability: escape sign luminaires in a sophisticated design. The Lighting Handbook www. Transit Areas and Parking Light is ideal to bring a more pleasant touch to utility buildings. special requirements must be met in terms of lighting. Optimum lighting has to ensure the safety of athletes and the best possible viewing conditions for those performing. Leaving one’s car in a safely lit car park not only ensures that the paintwork will not be scratched but also that the driver will have a good feeling. and emergency lighting systems as an integral concept including the lighting management and service systems. the audience and the referees.com/applications Chapter 3 / 5 .Sport and Leisure For each type of sport.zumtobel. suspension from cord or pendant tube – tracks can be bent to specific radii.zumtobel.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook In lighting technology. exception: tracks with supporting section – acceptable: tracks used within manual reach DALI track – 3-phase track with built-in control lines for tapping DALI control signals – spotlights with DALI control gear can be individually dimmed and switched at zero power. tracks and continuous row lighting systems are vital components providing the basis for active light design. while spotlights fitted with colour filters allow to set the stage for pleasant choreographies of coloured light. dynamic shows and lighting sequences can be run in combination with the EMOTION touch panel by ZUMTOBEL 6 / Chapter 3 www. impressive lighting scenarios can be created. A fascinating interplay of dramatic brightness variations can be staged. independent of power supply – for each track. up to 64 DALI spots can be separately controlled – impressive.Spots and tracks – An unbeatable team 3-phase track – high professionalism due to variety of switching options – broad range of connectors for any type of track configuration – track can be easily installed on ceiling or wall. . Using DALI. fitted with electronic control gear only for use with state-of-the-art lamp technology: Pros: – universal 3-phase adapter by ZUMTOBEL – new generation of reflectors with four different beam angles. organic design Application: A generation of expressive spotlights with soft and flowing lines for accent and display lighting in – shops & display windows – galleries & showrooms – private settings Design by Massimo Iosa Ghini Models: – Spotlight system in two design sizes. in die-cast aluminium. titanium or white.zumtobel. convenient operation thanks to ZUMTOBEL’s new universal 3-phase adapter – can be quickly adjusted to changing lighting tasks using a wide range of interchangeable reflectors – low-voltage halogen incandescent lamps up to 100 W – metal halide lamps 20 W to 70 W – wide range of accessories that can be combined – organic design – AFPS (AirFlow Protection System): increases reliability of electronic ballasts. and appropriate DALI adapters for easy integration with digital lighting management systems The Lighting Handbook www. designed as interchangeable reflectors Benefits: – safe.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 7 .SOLAR II – New generation – flowing lines. extends service life of lamps – installation on DALI tracks with DALI transformer. display windows & retail areas – department stores & supermarkets – galleries & showrooms – private settings Models: – Spotlight system in three design sizes.VIVO – Light’s intuitive freedom of movement Application: ZUMTOBEL spotlight range for accent and display lighting.zumtobel. and appropriate DALI adapters for easy integration with digital lighting management systems . microstructure paint. silver or white. convenient operation thanks to ZUMTOBEL’s new universal 3-phase adapter – intuitive. precise adjustment by means of integral clip – track box fitted parallel to track ensures uncluttered look on ceiling 8 / Chapter 3 www. A real all-rounder for – shops. also for lighting foodstuffs Pros: – interchangeable reflectors – integral ball-and-socket joint – universal 3-phase adapter by ZUMTOBEL Benefits: – can be quickly adjusted to changing lighting tasks using a wide range of interchangeable reflectors – safe. Fitted with electronic control gear only for use with stateof-the-art lamp technology: Design by EOOS – low-voltage halogen incandescent lamps up to 100 W – metal halide lamps 20 W to 150 W – high-pressure sodium discharge lamps up to 100 W – wide range of accessories. made of diecast aluminium.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook – bayonet joint ensures minimum maintenance of lamps and easy replacement of reflectors and accessories – installation on DALI tracks with DALI transformer. VIVO-S and VIVO-SL – Spotlight system with three hundred and sixty degrees precision Models: – Recessed spotlight. Move and Retain (SMART) system for intuitive alignment – HIT G8. architecturally consistent lighting concept The Lighting Handbook – VIVO is a real all-rounder mastering every lighting task in shops and stores www. spotlight head pivots from position flush with ceiling to 90º – 2 design sizes: round and square Pros for VIVO-S: – pivots through up to 90° – rotates through 360° – pivots to position flush with ceiling – pivots progressively – Squeeze. also in case of low-profile ceilings – pivots through up to 50° – Squeeze.zumtobel.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 9 . Move and Retain (SMART) system for intuitive alignment Pros for VIVO-SL: – freedom of design.5 35/70 W and QT 90 W lamps – electronic ballast must be ordered separately Benefits: – complete solution combining ceiling-mounted module and track – highly flexible. U-shape.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook .zumtobel. no special lengths required Design by Studio Jean-Michel Wilmotte Material/design: – channel sections in aluminium extrusion. with flange – lighting inserts for various spotlight applications – lighting inserts for floodlighting and wide-area lighting – all lighting inserts can be clicked in and positioned without the use of tools – electrical connection via plugin contact (no tools required) Application: – shops & display windows – foyers & corridor areas – showrooms & galleries – offices & office areas Benefits: – only 100 mm wide. no flange – lighting channel. flushmounted. no flange – assembly of lengths on site – lighting inserts to be installed and shifted without any tools – prepared for operation with DALI (integral bus line) – extremely easy design (optional aid: configurator) – delivery ex warehouse. but with HIT up to 70 W – installed flush with ceiling (plasterboard ceilings).LIGHTTOOLS – Modular lighting system: inconspicuous. easy to install. assembled using 3 sections – luminaire housing made of bent sheet steel – lighting heads made of diecast aluminium – floodlight housing made of extruded aluminium section – electronic control gear (optional: DALI gear) 10 / Chapter 3 www. and versatile System range: – lighting channel. ceiling-bearing. can be clicked in without use of tools.Lamp(s): Spotlight Floodlight Linear – HIT-TC-CE/up to 70 W Spot & Flood – QT-LP 12/90 W Spot & Flood – QR-LP 70/50 W – HIT-CE G12/70 W – HST GX12/100 W – T 16 24 up to 54 W.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 11 .zumtobel. as exact definition of lengths not required until on site Easy installation – only few components need to be installed – no additional connectors required – lighting inserts can be fitted without use of tools – building management thanks to DALI integration: – integral bus line in channel as standard – control gear installed optionally – “endless” cable duct up to 25 m. ensures minimum installation effort The Lighting Handbook Versatility – suitable for all types of ceilings: – without flange for plasterboard ceilings – ceiling-bearing (with flange) for all other ceilings – various different channel looks: – with pivoting lighting heads – with flush lighting heads – as an “open” channel (gap between lighting inserts open) – as a “closed” channel (gaps closed by cover sections) www. DL & WF 3 pros: Current design – reduced to a minimum in material – extremely easy planning in advance. zumtobel.CARDAN-SPIRIT – Modular lighting system: unobtrusive and flexible System range: Ceiling-recessed luminaires – autonomous design according to the SPIRIT spotlight range – fitted with up to 4 x 70 W HIT – extremely flat design of model fitted with QR111 – wide range of technical lighting accessories – easy replacement of reflectors Lighting frame – autonomous.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook – in lighting frames in particular: – built-in electronic ballasts. separately for each lamp – DALI version (transformers & bus feed line) available if required – RGB model as “stand-alone” version also available upon request . unique design – high illumination output: up to 4 x 70 W HIT – can be fitted with mixed lamps – wide range of technical lighting accessories – DALI-compatible (inc. RGB colour changes) – can be installed in different locations in a room: – horizontally suspended – vertically suspended – installed on wall/ceiling Lighting technology: – lighting heads for no-tool reflector replacement – silver-colour spot & flood specular reflectors – complete range of accessories for the “Spirit” spotlight range can be used – lighting heads pivot on gimbals through approx. 2 x 45° 12 / Chapter 3 Application: – upmarket shops & shop windows – foyers & corridor areas – showrooms & galleries – entrance & office areas – prestigious private settings Design by Studio Jean-Michel Wilmotte www. Range/lamp(s): Ceiling-recessed luminaires – 1-lamp.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 13 . square – QR 111/100 W (also FLAT) – QT 12/100 W Spot & Flood – HIT-TC-CE 35 + 70 W Spot & Flood – separate ballasts (accessories) Lighting frame – 2-lamp to 4-lamp – QR 111/100 W FLAT – QT 12/100 W Spot & Flood – HIT-TC-CE 35 + 70 W Spot & Flood – electronic ballasts included 3 Pros: Functionality – complete SPIRIT accessories can be fitted – accessories replaced from the front (lamps & reflectors & filters) – ventilation of lighting head ensures optimum thermal conditions Lighting technology – Spirit lighting head as base – power packages: up to 4 x 70 W HIT – can be fitted with mixed lamps – prepared for DALI integration – FLAT version for QR 111 Variety of creative design options – recessed into ceiling – horizontally & vertically suspended – installed on wall & underneath the ceiling The Lighting Handbook www.zumtobel. round – 1-lamp to 4-lamp. Schott Spectraflex) – fibre with terminal light emission (PMMA. A broad product range including light engines and optical fibres Models: Engines – halogen QR-CBC 50–100 W light engines – HIT 35–250 W light engines – HIT 150/250 W light engines. 1–10 V.STARFLEX – The modular fibre optic system Fibre optic technology provides fascinating options for precise. impressive display lighting.zumtobel. Mitsubishi) – side-radiating fibre (PMMA. Mitsubishi) Accessories – colour and colour temperature correction filters – colour and sparkle-effect wheel modules – control lines and input units 14 / Chapter 3 www. The Lighting Handbook . DMX) Light outlets – decorative crystal light heads – pivoting surface-mounted and recessed lenses with defined beam angle – IP-protected light outlets for outdoor and underwater applications – projection heads for extremely narrow-beam lighting as well as slide and gobo projections Optical fibre – fibre with terminal light emission (glass.com/productsites as well as a variety of accessories allow to create customised lighting solutions for numerous applications. controllable (DALI. zumtobel. g. museums and galleries based on fibre optics The Lighting Handbook www.Benefits: – precise direction of light – colour temperature can be adjusted to meet special project requirements – broad range of light engines from 35 W to 250 W. foodstuffs or cases with alarm system) jewellery/watches – can be integrated with light. wells and ponds viding accents (water film on stainless steel sheets.– lighting of applications proming pools. UV and IR components – projection of logos or slides – modular design for customised project solutions Pros: STARFLEX for presentation and retail – maintenance-friendly and – UV/IR-free lighting of fashion space-saving (e.– precise illumination of ing management solutions display windows and showvia control line of bus syscases tem STARFLEX for art and culture – conservational lighting without UV and IR components – light colour adjusted via corresponding light sources and fibre material – precise narrow-beam illumination with sharp outlines via appropriate outlets STARFLEX for wellness and fitness areas – underwater lighting in swim.) STARFLEX projection – Projection e. for indoor and outdoor areas as well as damp areas – separation of light and electricity. g.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 15 . etc.: at the cinema. display items. for product advertising or visitor information in shops. 9 mm 79 6.0 mm Outer diameter Maximum number of sheathing of individual fibres per common end spigot 2.57 0.50 16 / Chapter 3 www.5 mm 2.0 mm 3.7 mm 307 3.Properties and applications of optical fibres Fibre Properties material Glass – can withstand relatively high temperatures (up to 110 °C) – extremely long service life (in excess of 20 years) – relatively tight bending radius – projects preferring relatively warm light colour PMMA – cheaper than glass – life time in excess of 20 years – projects involving relatively cool light colour – choice of side-radiating or terminal light emitting fibres – side-radiating and terminal light-emitting fibres can be combined in a single fibre bundle – fibre bundle can optionally be assembled on site Assembly of glass fibre bundles Active diameter of fibre cable 1.87 0.0 mm 1. display shelving and show cases – starry skies in hotels and wellness areas – outdoor lighting or in areas with high air humidity 1m 2m 3m 4m 5m 6m 7m 8m 9 m 10 m 0.5 mm 6.71 0.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook Length-based correction factors (attenuation) for glass fibre cables .93 0.81 0.zumtobel.66 0.0 mm 4.4 mm 36 8.7 mm 20 Minimum bending radius 7 mm 11 mm 14 mm 21 mm 32 mm 42 mm Applications – glass display cases in museums – saunas and steam baths – hotel and restaurant lighting – applications requiring high levels of illumination – retail shop windows.76 0.9 mm 176 4.2 mm 615 2.54 0.62 0. factory-assembled) Active diameter of fibre cable Outer diameter Maximum number of sheathing of individual fibres per common end spigot crimped/ spliced 2.0 mm 8/4 Minimum bending radius 1.5 mm 37/18 8.87 0.0 mm 10.0 mm 1.72 0.0 mm 8.79 0.83 0.Assembly of PMMA fibre bundles (terminal light emission.0 mm 19 11.0 mm 72/35 6.2 mm 575/300 2.65 0.62 Assembly of PMMA fibre bundles (side radiation.0 mm 6 Maximum number of individual fibres per common end spigot (spliced) 40 10 5 3 The Lighting Handbook www.95 0.5 mm 80 8.5 mm 2.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 17 .0 mm 11 14.91 0.0 mm 8 mm 12 mm 16 mm 24 mm 36 mm 48 mm 60 mm 75 mm Length-based correction factors (attenuation) for PMMA cables 1m 2m 3m 4m 5m 6m 7m 8m 9 m 10 m 0.0 mm 3.5 mm 6.75 0.zumtobel.5 mm 20/10 10.5 mm 13/6 12.0 mm 143/70 5.69 0.0 mm 4. factory-assembled) Outer diameter Maximum number of of sheathing individual fibres per common end spigot (crimped) 4.7 mm 342/165 4. shopping arcades 18 / Chapter 3 www. high-quality downlight system for wide-area general lighting Application: reception areas. conference rooms. high-quality MINIATURE downlight system for accent lighting Application: display lighting. foyers and all other applications for which surface-mounted luminaires can be used 2LIGHT – unique. corridors. small presentation areas. high-quality MINIATURE downlight system for accent lighting – surface-mounted housing can be installed quickly using CLIX mechanism Application: display lighting. reception areas. cafeterias. high-quality MINIATURE downlight system for accent lighting – maximum application flexibility thanks to integral pivoting lamp units Application: sales counters.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook . bars. residential properties 2LIGHT-C MINI (CARDAN) – unique. points of sale. hotels. restaurants. waiting areas. foyers. restaurants. surfacemounted – unique.zumtobel. shelf lighting 2LIGHT MINI. relaxation areas. corridors.2LIGHT – High-quality downlight system 2LIGHT MINI – unique. reception areas. offices. restaurants Design by Hartmut S. museums 2LIGHT MDW (multi-directional wallwasher) – innovative. waiting areas. retail areas. conference rooms. flat aluminium frame in titanium colour – high-quality printed safety glass panel – unique Mellow Downlight effect The Lighting Handbook www. fully flexible wallwasher reflector technology for brightening up vertical areas Application: corridors. presentation areas. Engel Impressive looks Winner of the 2005 iF Design Award – unobtrusive.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 19 .zumtobel.2LIGHT-C (CARDAN) – unique high-quality downlight system for accent lighting – maximum application flexibility thanks to integral pivoting lamp units Application: shops. The unique EasyClean catch enables quick and easy relamping. 20 / Chapter 3 www. At the same time. 2LIGHT is light-tight in the ceiling.zumtobel.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook . Soft. pleasantly bright light is provided. Unique technical lighting features innovative principle of reflector splitting – diffuse light: a special matt-sanded plastic panel behind the safety glass ensures a matched soft light component around the reflector. – direct reflector light: light component directed downwards via facetted reflector.Benefits: Easiest possible maintenance/easy handling 2LIGHT has a completely closed housing. Models: 2LIGHT (fixed) 2LIGHT-C (pivots on gimbals) 2LIGHT MDW (multi-directional wallwasher) 2LIGHT MINI single module 2LIGHT MINI double module 2LIGHT MINI triple module 2LIGHT MINI surfacemounted 2LIGHT single module 2LIGHT double module 2LIGHT triple module The Lighting Handbook www.zumtobel.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 21 . zumtobel.com/productsites 2LIGHT/ 2LIGHT MDW double module 408 x 216 mm 152 mm TC-TELI 2x32/42 W HIT-TC-CE 2x20/35/70 W HIT-CE 2x35/70 W .Overview: 22 / Chapter 3 Protection class IP 44 Accessories Colour filter Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Interchangeable reflectors Mounting kit for thin ceilings IP 44 IP 44 IP 44 IP 40 IP 44 Colour filter Mounting kit for thin ceilings Colour filter Mounting kit for thin ceilings Colour filter Colour filter for soft light component Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Multi Directional Wallwasher Colour filter for soft light component Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Multi Directional Wallwasher IP 44 Type 2LIGHT MINI 2LIGHT-C MINI Module size 118 x 118 mm Mounting depth Lamp(s) 100 mm CDM-TM 20/35 W QT-LP to 75 W 118 x 118 mm 120 mm 256 x 118 mm 103 mm 373 x 118 mm 103 mm 2LIGHT MINI single module 2LIGHT-C MINI double module 2LIGHT-C MINI triple module 2LIGHT MINI Surface-mounted 2LIGHT/ 2LIGHT MDW single module 127 x 127 mm x – (height) 175 mm 216 x 216 mm 152 mm LED WN/WW or LED RGB/W new! CDM-TM 20/35 W QT-LP to 50 W CDM-TM 20/35 W QT-LP to 50 W CDM-TM 20/35 W QT-LP to 75 W TC-TELI 1x32/42 W HIT-TC-CE 1x20/35/70 W HIT-CE 1x35/70 W The Lighting Handbook www. com/productsites IP 44 Colour filter for soft light component and directional light Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Interchangeable reflectors Colour filter for soft light component and directional light Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Interchangeable reflectors Colour filter for soft light component and directional light Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Interchangeable reflectors IP 44 2LIGHT-C double module 408 x 216 mm 152 mm TC-TELI 2x32/42 W HIT-TC-CE 2x20/35/70 W 2LIGHT-C triple module 600 x 216 mm 152 mm TC-TELI 3x32/42 W HIT-TC-CE 3x20/35/70 W Chapter 3 / 23 .The Lighting Handbook 2LIGHT/ 2LIGHT MDW triple module 600 x 216 mm 152 mm Colour filter for soft light component Casting surround Mounting kit for thin ceilings Multi Directional Wallwasher IP 44 IP 44 2LIGHT-C single module 216 x 216 mm 152 mm TC-TELI 1x32/42 W TC-L 1x80 W/2x55 W T-16 3x24 W HIT-TC-CE 1x20/35/70 W HIT-CE 3x35/70 W TC-TELI 1x32/42 W HIT-TC-CE 1x20/35/70 W www.zumtobel. ideal for highlighting vertical surfaces. . reduced luminance levels and optimum efficiency. HG/LG Highly specular darklight reflector optic for glare-free working at the highest level.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook HWW The special ribbed structure of the reflector produces asymmetrical light distribution. HL/LL The white reflector optic is a perfect match for the decorative accessories. HM/LM Good looks are guaranteed by this matt reflector optic with reduced dust sensitivity.PANOS L and H – Multi-talented downlights PANOS L – recessed depth of just 100 mm – maximum efficiency levels PANOS H – satisfies the most stringent glare limitation requirements without the need for accessories Reflectors and their applications HF/LF The precision-shaped facets provide brilliant effects. Design by Sottsass Associati 24 / Chapter 3 www.zumtobel. – ideal temperature manand sealed.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 25 . is of heat precisely applied onto the – longer lamp service life high-quality polycarbonate thanks to reduced temreflectors of the PANOS L+H peratures ranges by means of sputtering. Facetted. – optimum reflection so-called high-purity silver. fect glare control and ideal light distribution – high-quality appearance with darklight effect and iridescence-free reflector – extremely easy maintenance and easy cleaning The Lighting Handbook www. Benefits: – optimum lighting effect at high efficiency levels. ® new PSP+ surface is already without using technical lighting accessories revealed by its name: Pure Silver Plated+ –100 % silver. highquality 4-chamber metallising process applied at high vacuum./flange unit The reflector/flange unit is installed by means of a “twist and lock mechanism” without any tools.zumtobel. range Benefits: – tremendous light output – light output ratio increased by as much as 21% – increased lighting level leads to reduced maintenance factor – innovative surface stability – extremely durable and ultra-hard reflector surface – excellent maintenance qualities – iridescence-free reflector Finest aluminium and silver plating by sputtering Sputtering is a unique. The ballast box has a rapid locking device and forms a pre-assembled luminaire unit with the reflector.PSP+® (Pure Silver Plated+) – brilliant new finish for downlight with silber-plated reflector What is innova– glare control in conformity tive about the with EN 12464 standard. smooth agement allows lamps to and wallwasher finishes are operate in optimum output available. Combined refl. perInstallation instructions No-tool installation The mounting ring made of die-cast aluminium is fitted without tools using spring clips. It is ideal for use with strict fire regulations. PANOS MWW As regards its look on the ceiling.PANOS M/MWW – Impressive and powerful PANOS M Metal reflector for high temperature resistance.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook . PANOS M and MWW give lighting designers maximum freedom for professionally setting the lighting stage. Mounting rings and cooling attachments made of die-cast aluminium. 26 / Chapter 3 www. the wallwasher with asymmetrical light distribution is not different from rotationally symmetrical luminaires. Wide range of lamps With the wide range of lamps that can be fitted. It does not interfere with the interior design. PANOS M LG/HG and PANOS M LM/HM Outstanding surface properties and optimum thermal management ensure maximum luminous flux when fitted with 2 x 42 W TC-TELI.zumtobel. The luminaire is light-tight in the ceiling. Ideal for use with lamps that generate a lot of heat. and can be operated completely closed with IP54. height 3 m Accent lighting by PANOS S150 with HIT G8. specific areas can be shaded. it is possible to illuminate a wall from its top edge.5 4 x PANOS S150 FL 70 W 500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 Accent lighting by PANOS S200 with HIT G12 4 x PANOS S200 FL 70 W 500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 Wallwashing by PANOS S250 with HIT-DE The Lighting Handbook 500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 3 x PANOS S250 70 W Chapter 3 / 27 www.PANOS S – Incredibly versatile. providing more freedom for vertical adjustment With PANOS S fully swivelled out to 60°. As the lighting head and the housing are separately adjustable. For illumination of different levels of shelving.zumtobel. PANOS S can be swivelled into the ceiling by up to 45°. Suitable reflectors for any situation Comparing light distribution/room: length 5 m.com/productsites . made of high-quality UV-resistant polycarbonate for perfect light distribution. matt and painted – various cover frames: white. smooth. chromium.zumtobel. Persuasive freedom of design – various reflector optics: faceted. titanium.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook Less installation time – PANOS no-tool quick installation – “shift & lock” system for fixing cover frame – quick and easy subsequent installation of attachements .PANOS Q – Square downlight for uncompromising looks and lighting technology Perfect one-piece reflector base Consistently square reflector. light-tight. frameless PANOS Q Low – trendy attachments fitted as block or frame – suspended attachment and technical lighting accessories PANOS Q High Reflector models faceted smooth matt white Frame models titanium chrome white frameless model Attachments Attachments 28 / Chapter 3 www. matt asymmetrical PANOS S 100/150/200/250 spot. smooth. painted. wallwasher smooth. illumination of vertical areas huge variety of light sources. energy-efficient. matt. consistent appearance. flood general lighting with high wattages. reduced building and installation costs. lhousing light-tight uniform illumination of vertical areas. matt. variety of surface finishes perfect glare control. painted matt . perfect glare control. high light output ratio. painted. matt faceted. can be swivelled in and out.com/productsites for ceilings without mounting depth. glare control (DSE-compatible).The Lighting Handbook Type PANOS L Ceiling cut-out Light sources 175/200/250 PANOS H PANOS M 100/150/200/250 Reflector optic Light distribution faceted. smooth. painted. painted. mounting depth only 100 mm. smooth. exceptional. uniform ceiling look uncompromising flexibility. large variety of surface finishes perfect one-piece reflector base. calm. IR/UV-free light PANOS A/AD Surface-mounted PANOS Q 190/190 250/250 faceted. long service life. DSE-compatible without attachment. smooth. highly convenient control www. partly structrured Features high light output ratio. matt Chapter 3 / 29 PANOS LED 150 smooth.zumtobel. optimum. flat circular design Overview of the PANOS range PANOS M LG/HG 200/250 PANOS M LM/HM PANOS MWW 150/200 smooth. wallwasher faceted. design freedom (colours + attachments) 1000 lm/2000 lm white light or 1000 lm BioMotion 2700/6500 K. HST 50 W Application: – shops & display windows – galleries & showrooms – hotels & wellness Benefits: – flush with floor or overlapping frame without visible screw heads – “glass-only” model – models with reduced surface temperature to protect people and property 30 / Chapter 3 round or square.PASO II – Recessed floor luminaire system PASO II knows just how to hit all the right buttons when it comes to setting dramatic contemporary lighting scenes whilst nevertheless remaining unobtrusive itself. A generous helping of lighting technology packed into models ranging in size from small to large allows fine-tuning to provide customised lighting solutions.zumtobel. (120 mm Ø or side length) (190 mm Ø or side length) (260 mm Ø or side length) – prestigious private settings.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook – patented sealing system to protect against penetration of surface water – various technical lighting accessories . The luminaire housing and covers are Models: PASO II D/Q 120 – LED with LEDOS board units and PowerLED – QR-CBC and PAR 16 – “MicroLynxF” 7 W compact fluorescent lamps PASO II D/Q 190 – QR-CBC and QR 111 – TC-TEL compact fluorescent lamps – HIT-TC-CE 20 W PASO II D/Q 260 – PAR 38 – TC-TEL compact fluorescent lamps – LED floor lighting tile – HIT up to 70 W. indoor and outdoor areas www. for recess into floor Spot and superspot Floodlighting PASO II extra low-profile design Use in screeded floors.Pros: PASO II with LED technology – luminaires with LED boards for decorative pinpoint lighting in static version or with variable RGB colours PASO II – everything in the right light Guiding light – luminaires with PowerLEDs for lighting columns – lighting tile with variable RGB colours.zumtobel. without impacting on the structural calculations of concrete ceilings Wallwashers 100 mm PASO II D/Q range. low-profile design 190 mm HIT 20 W compact fluorescent lamps up to 10 W TC-DEL 260 mm HIT 20 W compact fluorescent lamps up to 18 W TC-DEL 370 mm HIT bis 70 W compact fluorescent lamps up to 18 W TC-DEL/TC-F 36 W The Lighting Handbook PASO II accessories for an impressive yet safe presence – colour filters for coloured – honeycomb meshes for glare accent lighting control – casting surround for quick – IR blocking filters for reducing and safe installation surface temperature – mounting kit for cavity floors/ – anti-slip glass panel available hollow ceilings for fixing PASO upon request II luminaires with overlapping – IP 67 general-purpose box for frame cover external control gear (PASO II S) www.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 31 . it forms an optical system that ensures glare control in conformity with relevant standards at flat angles (EN 12464) and reduced luminance at steep angles. mum energy efficiency. Via adjustable reflectors. Diffusor layer Micro-pyramidal layer for directing light Base 32 / Chapter 3 www. Together with two other layers. the light distribution curve of the luminaire’s indirect component can be adjusted to the suspension height of the luminaire.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook The “Photometric examination of new lighting systems” research carried out at TU Ilmenau demonstrates that systems using MPO technology obtain excellent values with respect to contrasts in the room. .zumtobel. in the task area and on the screen.VAERO – Waveguide luminaire providing soothing light for people and rooms Design by Hartmut S. Engel Ingeniously designed VAERO waveguide luminaire with MPO lighting technology for maxiBalance between energy efficiency and lighting quality The sandwich construction of the micropyramidal optic lets the light really sparkle. 2 designs available – structured and homogeneous. zumtobel.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 33 . Thanks to the MPO diffuser – and reduced luminance –. The luminaires and their luminance levels blend harmoniously into the brightness pattern of the ceiling. Contrast rendition in the task area Visual contrasts in the task area are determined by luminance ratios. Contrasts between ceiling and luminaire Bright ceilings open up a room. Contrast rendition on screens In every location. ceilings and walls have a major impact. the viewability of computer screens is excellent. and no matter what the angle of inclination. too.Lighting quality created by contrast engineering Contrasts in the room Brightness perceived at the workplace is determined not only by illuminance – in fact. ink colour on background. e. The variable pendant length of VAERO and adjustable indirect components are unique. natural working atmosphere. screens must remain The Lighting Handbook free from annoying reflections. The reduced luminance of the MPO diffuser helps to improve contrast rendition (see TU Ilmenau research). www. g. Balanced luminance levels create a pleasant. zumtobel.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook base micro-pyramidal layer for directing the light .LIGHT FIELDS – Modular micro-pyramidal lighting system Design by Sottsass Associati Pure innovation for the office Micro-pyramidal optic Even in surface-mounted and recessed luminaires. the sandwich construction of the micro-pyramidal optic ensures both glare control in conformity with standards and reduced luminance for direct illumination – ideal for office lighting according to standard EN 12464. diffuser layer 34 / Chapter 3 www. Recessed 1198 x 298 2/28 W T16 1498 x 298 2/35 W T16 598 x 598 4/14 W T16 1248 x 310 2/28 W T16 1548 x 310 2/35 W T16 623 x 623 4/14 W T16 Surfacemounted 1248 x 310 2/28 W T16 1548 x 310 2/35 W T16 623 x 623 4/14 W T16 ID pendant 1248 x 310 2/54 W T16 1548 x 310 2/49 W T16 623 x 623 4/24 W T16 Free-standing luminaire 3/55 W TCL 3/80 W TCL LIGHT FIELDS model Recessed L-FIELDS E 4 x 4/14 W T16 L-FIELDS E 4 x 2/28 W T16 L-FIELDS E 4 x 2/28 W T16 L-FIELDS E 6 x 4/14 W T16 Surface-mounted L-FIELDS A 4 x 4/14 W T16 L-FIELDS A 4 x 2/28 W T16 L-FIELDS A 3 x 2/35 W T16 L-FIELDS A 4 x 2/28 W T16 L-FIELDS A 6 x 4/14 W T16 M 625 M 600 1-person office • 2-person office • • • 3-person office • • • • • • • • The Lighting Handbook www. they are ideal for the more stylish office.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 35 .Available as recessed/surface-mounted/pendant/ free-standing or cluster luminaires.zumtobel. with EN 12464 compliance over a range of ceiling heights and floor areas. energy efficiency and lighting quality Owing to their light distribution characteristics.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook . Design by Studio & Partners Technical lighting features: – bright visible luminance levels create an attractive impression of brightness – light is distributed uniformly in the room. In the process. not only is a high level Efficiency level of 57 %: MELLOW LIGHT IV with slotted sheet steel controller optic and 55 W TC-L lamp Efficiency level of more than 70 %: MELLOW LIGHT IV with microprismatic optic and 55 W TC-L lamp of uniformity achieved on the useful plane. but room peripheries such as ceilings and walls can be selectively brightened up as well. MELLOW LIGHT IV surface-mounted and recessed luminaires bring a “piece of sky” into the room. 100 50 0 100 Efficiency level of 67 %: MELLOW LIGHT IV with slotted sheet steel controller optic and two 24 W T5 lamps Effiency level of more than 80 %: MELLOW LIGHT IV with microprismatic optic and two 24 W T5 lamps 50 0 Bright. pleasant room impression …or “cave effect” with convenwith MELLOW LIGHT IV… tional solutions using louvre luminaires.MELLOW LIGHT IV – A piece of sky Balance.zumtobel. 36 / Chapter 3 www. This allows for active brightness management. the higher are the requirements for glare control of the lighting system – in particular where it has been installed directly above the workstation. efficient louvre technology and the typical gentle lighting effects of Mellow Light – glare control for upright displays meets specifications of EN12464 (with or without extra filter.Application and glare control Direct and reflected glare on upright and steeply inclined displays is minimised. 40 – 90 Laptops 55 – 90 Flatscreens 65 – 90 Conventional display 0 – 10 Organizer 0 – 40 Displays The more strongly inclined a computer display is.zumtobel. allowing for lighting solutions in conformity with the EN 12464 standard.com/productsites . without taking position of workstation into account (demonstrated by TU Ilmenau research) Louvre optic – classic with louvre technology in conformity with relevant standards – combination of proven. without taking position of workstation into account (demonstrated by TU Illmenau research) Slotted sheet steel controller optic – design-oriented slotted sheet steel controller optic – gentle light for ergonomically beneficial lighting conditions – in line with the basic concept of Mellow Light – screening prevents direct view of light source – ideal for upright and inclined displays (luminance reduced at all angles of view) – free arrangement in the room. depending on luminaire model) Chapter 3 / 37 The Lighting Handbook www. Micro-prismatic optic with cross pattern – innovative optic for maximum energy efficiency – gentle light for ergonomically beneficial lighting conditions – in line with the basic concept of Mellow Light – screening prevents direct view of light source – ideal for upright and inclined displays (luminance reduced at all angles of view) – free arrangement in the room. a room’s ambience can be changed radically.CIELOS – Modular luminous ceiling for creating designs with light and colour Design by Nicholas Grimshaw & Partners Application: Luminous ceilings capture our attention. Combined with selective accents. – entrance areas – conference and meeting rooms – shops Models: – 2 heights: 80 mm and 150 mm – 80 mm for white and monochrome – 150 mm for RGB – from 4/14 W to 12/21 W – 600 x 600 mm 900 x 900 mm – dynamic colour changes. controlled via EMOTION Touch 38 / Chapter 3 www. diffuse lighting fascinates the viewer.zumtobel. Wide-area.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook . Mounting heights often range from 300 to 700 mm. They rely exclusively on maximum clearance between lamp and diffuser in order to produce uniform illumination. Any other coloured film suitable for use in luminaires can also be used. The Lighting Handbook www. green and blue. Special coloured films that emit especially intense. yet hardly any of these luminous ceilings offers the same colour neutrality and infinite colour spectrum as CIELOS. Coloured lamps or sheathing the T16 light sources in coloured film produces coloured light. pure light were developed for CIELOS.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 39 .Pros: Conventional luminous ceilings use almost no lighting technology at all.zumtobel. They are available as accessories in the three primary colours red. Bonn – meets requirements for lighting of office areas according to EN 12464 Optics for all applications: Darklight louvre – specular louvre ensures ideal glare control according to EN 12464 Matt comfort louvre – bright.com/productsites . Complete range: – indirect/direct pendant luminaire – surface-mounted luminaire – wallwasher Application: – offices and schools Lighting technology: – miniature cell louvre used – DSE-compatible luminaire Design by ag Licht.CLARIS II – Luminaire system Minimised design with improved technical lighting features.zumtobel. Its angular shape and clear lines are unmistakable features of CLARIS II. friendly room atmosphere – in conformity with EN 12464 standard Surface finishes: powder-coated titanium or natural anodised finish Opal diffuser – closed luminaire – diffuse light distribution – harmoniously soft light creates communicative room atmosphere Easy design: easy design is ensured by standard module lengths The Lighting Handbook 40 / Chapter 3 www. plus protective film Can be used for continuous row lighting CLARIS II configurations Continuous row luminaires (pendant luminaires): – indirect/direct – direct only – indirect only – wallwasher Connectors for continuous design 300 225 225 225 300 150 300 The Lighting Handbook 300 www. releasing and replacing the light source is child’s play. light source already integrated. transparent connecting cable already fitted.zumtobel. Thanks to the convenient lever. Installation: time is money Invisible height adjustment inside.Practical technology Lamps are replaced straightforwardly from the top of the luminaire.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 41 . adjustment in longitudinal direction All inclusive Luminaire includes pre-installed suspension assembly. zumtobel.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook Day school Technical college/ evening school Office Office with DSE Open-plan office Technical drawing .RTX II – Design-oriented continuous row lighting system Design by Charles Keller Avant-garde in terms of both material and shape Application: offices and schools Individual luminaires and continuous row systems: – Pure aluminium – Matt bivergent or darklight reflector optic – Wallwasher for illuminating blackboards – Decorative optics Typical applications RTX II-C 1/35W 1/49W 1/54W 1/80W 2/28W 2/35W 2/49W 2/54W Day school Technical college/ evening school Office Office with DSE Open-plan office Technical drawing RTX II-D 1/35W 1/49W 1/54W 1/80W 2/28W 2/35W 2/49W 2/54W 42 / Chapter 3 www. 40 0.40 blackboard – luminaire distance [m] optimum range possible range possible range under certain conditions* The Lighting Handbook * Use strongly depends on architectural parameters and luminaire arrangement.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 43 .60 0.40 0.40 blackboard – luminaire distance [m] optimum range possible range possible range under certain conditions* * Use strongly depends on architectural parameters and luminaire arrangement.20 1.RTX II Wallwasher RTX II 1 x 49 W RTX II 1 x 54 W RTX II 1 x 80 W RTX RTX RTX RTX II II II II 2 x 28 W 2 x 35 W 2 x 49 W 2 x 54 W 300 Lux (Day school) 0. www.20 1.60 0.20 0.20 0.80 1.80 1.00 1.zumtobel. RTX II 1 x 80 W RTX II 2 x 49 W RTX II 2 x 54 W 500 Lux (Evening school and technical colleges) 0.00 1. com/productsites The Lighting Handbook . Packaging The mounting brackets are located ready for use outside the box so there is no need to open it. schools.zumtobel. simply pull away the film which leaves no residue. saving the time. and even used to light the construction site. Protective film A special self-adhesive protective film made of recyclable material offers optimum protection against louvre soiling. MIRAL T16 can therefore be fully installed whilst building work is still in progress. transport and temporary storage. Advantage: the luminaire remains protected in its packaging during preinstallation. resources and energy that would otherwise be spent on lamp procurement.MIRAL T16 – Surface-mounted louvre luminaire Complete louvre luminaire range: – surface-mounted luminaire – indirect/direct pendant luminaire – wallwasher Application: offices. 44 / Chapter 3 www. shops Benefits: – BIVERGENZ® plus lighting technology – quick installation thanks to – mounting bracket – externally located terminal block – pre-fitted lamp – protective film Lay in Fold up Snap in Design by Studio Ambrozus Light source included MIRAL T16 is pre-fitted with an LF840 lamp (optionally LF830). Thus the connecting cable can be fitted conveniently and in minimum time without needing to open the luminaire housing. Electrical connection Quick installation is also guaranteed thanks to the exactly centered 5-pole plug-in terminal (CE-compliant) easily accessible from outside the luminaire. Once the building is finished. This keeps the installation effort to a minimum. two operations with the electric screwdriver.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 45 .Traditional installation MIRAL T16 installation Traditional installation for the electrician meant four trips up and down the ladder.zumtobel. MIRAL T16 installation for the electrician means getting the same result in half the time! The Lighting Handbook www. zumtobel.FREELINE – The TASK AREA luminaire – TASK AREA luminaire for task area-related indirect/ direct lighting – luminaires are arranged between room axes. directly above workstation and at right angle to window – one luminaire per workstation ensures lighting conditions in conformity with relevant standards Design by Ingenhoven and Partner Architekten FREELINE (matt bivergent louvre) FREELINE (MPO technology) 46 / Chapter 3 www.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook . DALI-dimmable or dimming-on-demand function (LDoD) – Designed by: IOA (Ingenhoven Overdiek Architekten)/Düsseldorf – Dimensions: length 2436 mm (54 W) or length 3036 mm (80 W) width 98 mm height 62 mm weight: 4.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 47 . natural anodised finish The Lighting Handbook www. DALI-dimmable or dimming-on-demand function (LDoD) – Designed by: IOA (Ingenhoven Overdiek Architekten)/Düsseldorf – Dimensions: length 2436 mm (54 W) or length 2736 mm (80 W) width 98 mm height 62 mm weight: 4.Lighting technology: matt bivergent louvre for optimum lighting conditions at the workstation – Wattages: 1/54 W + 2 x 2/24 W T16 1/80 W + 2 x 2/24 W T16 2/54 W + 2 x 2/24 W T16 Models with electronic ballast. natural anodised finish Lighting technology: micro-pyramidal optic with glare-free light radiation characteristics – Wattages: 2 x 1/49 W T16 2 x 1/54 W T16 2 x 1/80 W T16 Models with electronic ballast.5 kg – Material: extruded aluminium.zumtobel.5 kg – Material: extruded aluminium. are customised and energyefficient. … can be installed quickly.zumtobel. energy efficiency and reduced installed load Design by Engel & Zimmermann – indirect/direct distribution – 2 x 1/55 W or 2 x 1/80 W TC-L – large direct component with cell louvre in darklight or matt comfort optic – glare reduction L<1000 cd/m2 – two separate luminaire heads made of anodised aluminium – heads pre-assembled for extremely quick installation – stand made of anodised aluminium – U-shaped steel base 48 / Chapter 3 www. Free-standing uplights … … provide maximum flexibility when changing or reorganising one’s place. allow for low level heights. LIGHT FIELDS-S Brilliant light thanks to innovative MPO-PLUS technology Design by Sottsass Associati – indirect/direct distribution – asymmetrical indirect component – 3/55 W or 3/80 W TC-L – direct component via micropyramidal optic – glare reduction L<1000 cd/m2 (3/55 W) – reflector can be swung open for easy cleaning – flat luminaire head made of anodised aluminium – backlit decorative frame attached MINIUM LITE Max. … don’t have to be installed on/in the ceiling. MINIUM LITE.Free-standing uplights – LIGHT FIELDS-S. KAREA... … can be personalised. LANOS . as required and independent of the building. easily. … can be positioned freely at the workplace. … focus light onto the visual task area.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook . or silver microstructure paint – available in heights of 1850 mm or 2000 mm The Lighting Handbook SwitchDim and SensControl allow users to adjust the lighting to meet their personal requirements. or silver microstructure paint – available in heights of 1850 mm or 2000 mm LANOS Pleasant lighting effect in a classic design Design by DaCosta & Wolf – indirect/direct distribution – 4/55 W TC-L – luminaire head with lateral perforated metal refractors – rounded aluminium stand with asymmetrical or symmetrical luminaire-head connection – U-shaped or square steel base – colours: titanium. free-standing uplights by ZUMTOBEL provide the perfect solution meeting any requirement. From simple switching and dimming through to fully automatic control using presence detectors and brightness sensors.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 49 .zumtobel. SwitchDim Simple dimming and switching using momentary-action switches SensControl Fully automatic control based on daylight and the user’s presence SensControl-DALI additional option for link to LITENET lighting management systems www. or symmetrical luminaire-head connection – U-shaped or square base (steel) – colours: titanium.KAREA Flexible design – unobtrusive appearance Design by DaCosta & Wolf – indirect/direct distribution – 4/55 W TC-L – direct component via perforated metal optic – flat luminaire head – angular aluminium stand with asym. SensControlDALI goes even further by using DALI to integrate the free-standing uplight into the building’s lighting management system. e. cove lighting in dynamic colours can be generated in a space-saving and energy-efficient manner. Moreover. which means that the illumination output can be used much more efficiently. The energy efficiency of LEDs greatly exceeds that of low-voltage halogen luminaires. is one of the main benefits. The light can be optimally directed into the area required by means of lens optics. In addition to conservational lighting and long maintenance intervals. and consequently the absence of any heat radiation. by means of LED RGB lighting solutions. Benefits of LED technology in comparison with fluorescent lamps 50 / Chapter 3 www. projected light is a main benefit.LED luminaires – From semiconductor to lighting innovation Static and dynamic light Benefits of LED technology: – long service life = low maintenance costs – low power consumption = minimum operating costs – vibration and impact-proof – compact size Benefits of LED technology in comparison with low-voltage halogen – high colour stability – efficient control thanks to simple control system – low heat generation – light without IR/UV In comparison with low-voltage halogen. light without IR/UV in particular.zumtobel. In comparison with compact fluorescent lamps.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook .g. the benefits are slightly smaller. ventilator or water cooling). cooling fins. In order to ensure a service life of 50. the boards must be properly cooled (e.000 hours for an LED luminaire. The Lighting Handbook www.g.). the LED is less energyefficient than the following lamp technologies: – fluorescent lamps: 80–100 lm/W – high-pressure halogen lamps: 90–100 lm/W – high-pressure sodium vapour lamps: 100–120 lm/W – LEDs: 40–80 lm/W LEDs don’t like high ambient temperatures. sauna.zumtobel.Limits of LED technology Today.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 51 . this will strongly effect luminous flux and reduce the LEDs’ service life. etc.g. If LEDs are used at high ambient temperatures (e. High-performance LEDs generate a lot of heat at the board side. Typical applications Properties – 1000 lm projected light – colour temperature adjustable from 2700–6500 K – “stand-alone” variation has a 4-button control panel for setting colour temperature with six pre-defined steps – RGB colour dynamism via EMOTION touch panel or DMX – colour temperature adjustable from 2700–6500 K – RGB colour dynamism via DMX – 1000 lm and 2000 lm as an alternative to 18 W/26 W compact fluorescent lamps – colour temperatures of 3000 K and 4000 K – 1000 lm projected light – colour temperature adjustable from 2700–6500 K – RGB colour dynamism via EMOTION touch panel or DMX – swivelling recessed downlights for decorative accent lighting – 350 lm projected light as an alternative to 20 W low voltage halogen – indirect RGB light for “mellow downlight” effect in dynamic colours – 1000 lm as an alternative to 18 W compact fluorescent lamps – colour temperatures of 3000 K and 4000 K – 1100 lm projected light with 3000 K – 1300 lm projected light with 4000 K – projected LED accent light as an alternative to 75 W low voltage halogen * with 24 V and 350 mA luminaires.com/productsites .zumtobel. dimmability is dependent upon type of control gear! 52 / Chapter 3 www. com/productsites Chapter 3 / 53 .zumtobel. dimmable DALI white indoor applications PANOS PureWhite 230 V dimmable DALI (via Emotion touch panel) control of white light via RGB RGB indoor applications PANOS BioMotion 350 mA switchable. dimmable DALI (via Emotion touch panel). 230 V switchable. dimmable DALI white indoor applications 2LIGHT MINI PureWh. dimmable DALI RGB + white indoor applications 2LIGHT MINI RGB/W 230 V switchable.Supply 230 V Switchable/ dimmable* switchable. dimmable DMX Monochrome/ RGB control of white light via RGB RGB Indoor/outdoor applications indoor applications Product TEMPURA spotlight 230 V control of white light via RGB RGB indoor applications TEMPURA downlight 230 V switchable. dimmable DALI (via Emotion touch panel) white indoor applications VIVO LED www. dimmable white blue indoor applications PANOS S 24 V switchable. dimmable DMX dimmable DALI. slot and channel mounting – SYSTEMLED Deco Basic optimised for cove lighting – not suitable for installation in floors! – IP 68 version for underwater lighting – walk-over capacity to max. slot and channel mounting – not suitable for installation in floors! – modular LED light line system for individual. 1000 kg * with 24 V and 350 mA luminaires.Typical applications Properties – 300 lm projected light – 3000 K and 4700 K colour temperatures – system combines miniaturised LED spots for accent lighting with T16 fluorescent lamps for wallwashing – LED light lines for room illumination and atmospheric lighting effects – single and nine-fold modules – nine-fold modules feature dynamic light design whereby the individual lighting cubes can be randomly dimmed up and down – colour temperature via control button in six pre-defined steps from 2700–6500 K – luminaire is part of the SCONFINE pendant luminaire series – illuminance in accordance with EN 1838 for additional emergency lighting close to ground level – unique lens/reflector optic ensures optimal light distribution on the floor – available in colour temperature of 3000 K/5000 K – modular LED light line system for individual. dimmability is dependent upon type of control gear! 54 / Chapter 3 www.zumtobel.com/productsites . Supply 24 V Switchable/ dimmable* switchable, dimmable Monochrome/ RGB white Indoor/outdoor applications indoor applications Product MICROS 24 V 230 V switchable, dimmable (light lines) white RGB (light lines) indoor applications SUPERSYSTEM 230 V switchable monochrome indoor applications SCONFINE CUBO 230 V switchable, dimmable white indoor applications SCONFINE SFERA 230 V 350 mA switchable, dimmable white blue indoor applications outdoor applications ORILED 24 V switchable, dimmable white blue RGB indoor applications outdoor applications SYSTEMLED FLOOD 24 V switchable, dimmable white blue RGB indoor applications outdoor applications SYSTEMLED DECO 230 V 24 V switchable, dimmable yellow red green white blue indoor applications outdoor applications LEDOS M www.zumtobel.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 55 Typical applications Properties – 8 mm mounting depth allows installation in parquet, tiles and laminated flooring – suitable for installation in furniture – walk-over capacity to max. 250 kg – accent spotlight (spot/flood) – walk-over capacity to max. 1000 kg – available in colour temperature of 3000 K/5700 K – uniformly illuminated light points or surfaces – walk-over capacity to max. 1000 kg – diffuser with transparent sides gives the luminaire unit a floating appearance – model without frame also available – extremely easy wiring via self-tapping cable connector for indoor applications – walk-over capacity to max. 500 kg – RGB models feature integrated DALI power supply unit – also available as a wall-mounted version – also available as a decorative floor lighting tile (IP 67) – “glass only” model available for indoor applications – walk-over capacity to max. 1000 kg * with 24 V and 350 mA luminaires, dimmability is dependent upon type of control gear! 56 / Chapter 3 www.zumtobel.com/productsites Supply 24 V Switchable/ dimmable* switchable, dimmable Monochrome/ RGB white blue Indoor/outdoor applications indoor applications Product LEDOS O 230 V 24 V 350 mA switchable, dimmable white blue RGB indoor applications outdoor applications LEDOS B 230 V 24 V switchable, dimmable white blue RGB indoor applications outdoor applications LEDOS 230 V 24 V switchable, dimmable white blue RGB indoor applications outdoor applications LEDOS II 230 V 24 V switchable, dimmable yellow red green white blue RGB white blue RGB indoor applications outdoor applications KAVA LED 230 V switchable, RGB dimmable DALI indoor applications outdoor applications PHAOS LINE 24 V dimmable RGB indoor applications PHAOS lighting tile 230 V 24 V 350 mA switchable, dimmable white blue RGB indoor applications outdoor applications PASO II LED www.zumtobel.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 57 SYSTEMLED – Modular LED light lines SYSTEMLED is a modular LED system for decorative light lines or wide-area illumination of walls. Pre-assembled plugin connectors at the modules help to reduce sources of error during installation, and minimise installation effort. The use of aluminium sections ensures optimum cooling of LED boards, which is a prereq- uisite to reach a service life of up to 50,000 hours! Varied accessories including a mounting channel, mounting springs and a diffuser provide for a wide range of applications. SYSTEMLED can be used in both indoor and outdoor areas. Channel installation: No-tool wiring using cables with pre-configured connectors. Using special steel springs, the modules are fitted in the channel or wall and ceiling cut-out without the use of any tools. 58 / Chapter 3 www.zumtobel.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook Options for installation: Pre-assembled modules in various lengths allow to flexibly adjust the light lines to projectspecific sections. DECOLINE is perfect for illuminating coves and for creating light lines uniformly illuminated by means of a diffuser. FLOODLINE provides uniform illumination of vertical areas (wallwashing). individual slot channel diffuser* installation installation installation DECOLINE IP 40 • • • • DECOLINE IP 65 • • FLOODLINE IP 40 • • • FLOODLINE IP 65 • * In DECOLINE IP 40, the diffuser is clipped onto the LED module. For DECOLINE IP 65, modules are supplied optionally with transparent or diffuse optic. SYSTEMLED Deco: Clip-on diffuser for perfect uniformity. The Lighting Handbook SYSTEMLED Deco Basic: Easy to install in the cove thanks to ready-to-connect modules inc. connecting cables. www.zumtobel.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 59 ORILED – Orientation lighting close to ground level with LED ORILED Functional is fitted with an LED optic (patent pending) that provides illuminance in conformity with the EN 1838 standard. ORILED Decorative, with its warm or blue light colour, is used in areas where the focus is on a decorative lighting effect. By using different control gear, the luminaires can be easily integrated into building management systems such as LUXMATE or the ONLITE emergency lighting system. In emergency cases, too, additional escape route lighting is ensured via a central battery or 1 h/3 h separate battery packs. The luminaires with IP 65 protection can be used for a broad range of applications. A variety of accessories is available for easy luminaire installation. ORILED Functional: light distribution at ground level 60 / Chapter 3 www.zumtobel.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook the secret of ORILED’s excellent illuminance is. its reflector combined with its unique lens optic. mounting frame or casting surround.com/productsites . ORILED therefore has no visible screw heads. The Lighting Handbook Bollard with recessed 350 mA luminaire Recessed housing with flushfitted luminaire Chapter 3 / 61 www.Besides its two 1 W LEDs. By means of flexible mounting brackets. bollard. the luminaires are fixed in the wall cut-out. or in the surface-mounted housing. The stainless steel frame is fixed to the luminaire housing via CAMLOCK fasteners. in particular.zumtobel. from inside to outside. HELISSA round Application: – indoor areas such as corridors. wellness areas) – outdoor areas around the house. Emergency lighting and dimmable models. entrance areas – public spaces All applications.g.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook Lamp(s) 2/9 W TC-SEL 1/22 W T16-R 1/55 W T16-R 2/18 W TC-L 1/22 W T16-R 2/18 W TC-DEL . can be implemented in the same. too. station concourses) – aggressive environments (chlorine or saline-contaiModels: Model HELISSA IP 40 Size D/Q 360 D/Q 450 HELISSA IP 65 D/Q 360 HELISSA square ning environments. stairs and waiting areas – applications in temporarily or permanently humid/damp environments (e. a discreet indirect light component creates a white or coloured lighting corona on the wall or ceiling. In addition to round or square glare-free optics.HELISSA – Stylish appearance with individuality for indoor and outdoor areas The decorative HELISSA wall/ceiling mounted luminaire with protection types IP 40 and IP 65 sets both indoor and outdoor areas masterfully centre stage while saving energy. highquality design using one luminaire range! 62 / Chapter 3 www. can be easily installed and maintained.zumtobel. cover frame is fixed without tools by means of CamLock fasteners – concealed screws – decorative cover frame optionally in white. titanium or aluminium. Accessories: Set of foil filters (red. frosted glass diffuser – glare-free and uniform illumination – high energy efficiency. compact/fluorescent lamps operated exclusively with electronic ballast convenient and versatile – easy installation – HELISSA IP 40: round fitting. diffuser unit (diffuser + aluminium frame) can be installed without tools thanks to twist and lock mechanism – HELISSA IP 65: round or square fitting with silicone seal and glass cover.Benefits/pros: high-quality and efficient – optimum materials for the respective application area: – HELISSA IP 40: sheet steel fitting. The Lighting Handbook www. blue. the lighting corona’s colour can be changed by fitting foil filters.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 63 . rugged polycarbonate diffuser – HELISSA IP 65: die-cast aluminium fitting.zumtobel. brightly polished/with protective coating economically efficient and flexible – luminaires are optionally switchable or analog/digitally dimmable – models in all design sizes/ versions are available in the same design and size with built-in 1 h or 3 h emergency lighting unit – all components are accommodated in the fitting All these features give HELISSA its unmistakable individuality. yellow) to create corona For more creative scope. com/productsites The Lighting Handbook .TECTON – Continuous-row lighting system TECTON Compact TECTON Retail TECTON-I Industry Design by Nicholas Grimshaw & Partners 64 / Chapter 3 www.zumtobel. emergency lighting and control. TECTON provides safety TECTON provides safety in several ways: – At the design stage. TECTON saves on installation costs “The easier. TECTON allows the luminaire modules to be placed anywhere on the trunking. – By the clear separation of emergency and escape-sign luminaires in two emergency-lighting circuits.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 65 . All components can be combined logically and simply in the modular system. the better”.TECTON provides flexibility Layout changes occur at ever shorter intervals in retail.zumtobel. depending on the continuous row configuration chosen. Not only does this save time. The Lighting Handbook www. with 11-pole wiring allowing any modifications in terms of brightness control or emergency lighting supply in conformity with relevant standards. business and industry. reducing TECTON installation costs by up to 60 percent through time savings. – By the ONLITE emergency luminaire range that can be fully customized to the TECTON system for safety and reliability of the lighting solution in conformity with relevant standards. making TECTON both versatile and easy to handle. The specially designed power conductor integrated in the trunking revolutionises installation. Technical alterations to the lighting can also be made on site. by the integration of mains lighting. but lower qualified and hence cheaper staff can do the work. demanding maximum flexibility from any continuous-row lighting system. Thanks to wideangle lighting technology. retail islands can be created using directed light. for instance. it is possible to create lighting focuses and. also enabling optimum illumination of gondola heads. Light with asymmetrical distribution in combination with special accessories such as UVA. pinpointed and brilliant. hypermarkets and supermarkets TECTON-H RBS The module for flexible lighting concepts: with the swivelling luminaire head. precisely accentuate shelves. . TECTON-H R A high-pressure module that provides highlights: wide-angle or narrow-beam lighting technology strikingly emphasises seasonal and pallet goods using directional light.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook TECTON-H RSRA The surface-mounted model adds refreshing lighting accents for the illumination of counters and fresh goods. meat and cold-meat filters makes the goods displayed appear delicious and tempting.zumtobel. it is easy to respond to any changes in room layout.TECTON – High-pressure modules for shops. IR. TECTON-H RSR Making homogeneous illuminated areas and wall surfaces come alive: using lighting technology with asymmetrical distribution. 66 / Chapter 3 www. www. The wide-angle. The Lighting Handbook The pool-light optic made of opal plastic impresses with harmonious. preferably in long corridor areas.TECTON – Decorative optics With its innovative darklight miniature cell louvre made of aluminised polycarbonate. the indirect/direct optic provides a new interpretation of ID lighting in a continuous-row lighting system. sophisticated zonal lighting in retail areas. The MELLOW LIGHT optic with its lighting chamber in diffuser pearl material and a slotted grid-mesh optic provides appropriately glarereduced light with visible luminance levels. Providing ambient lighting. it is also ideal for combination with accent lighting in retail areas.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 67 . it is ideal for use in demanding office applications and at POS terminals in retail areas. or cool ambient lighting at the bar. wide-area luminance levels on softly rounded surfaces. Specific applications include prestigious and retail areas with high aesthetic requirements. It is a perfect choice for wellness areas. Featuring a 50 % indirect and 50 % direct light component. purely indirect lighting characteristics of the indirect optic ensure uniformly illuminated ceilings.zumtobel. direct and indirect.SOLINA – The new high-bay reflector luminaire The new SOLINA high-bay reflector luminaire boasts a striking cylindrical design.zumtobel. can be separately switched and dimmed – same lamp and reflector range as COPA D – additionally reflector painted in titanium – one unit – variety of installation options (cord. as traditional high-bay reflector luminaire – colour sequences possible via LED RGB combined with EMOTION touch panel or other DALI-controlled systems – colour sequences possible via LED RGB. a die-cast aluminium housing (for the first time ever. adapter) – direct installation on the ceiling – accessories: IP 54 glass cover. a relatively small height (34 cm). with focus on lighting fresh products – architecture-centred luminaire with ceiling illumination Benefits: – both lighting types. pendant.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook . chain. Design by Charles Keller Application: – shop/retail. as indirect lighting components – static colour situations possible via indirect colour filters in red and blue www. and also includes a version for direct installation on the ceiling. direct and indirect lighting are combined in a high-bay reflector luminaire). prismatic glass cover – 2 food filters (M/CM+IR) – 2 coloured indirect filters (red + blue) 68 / Chapter 3 – industrial lighting. 100 W HST – reflectors: plastic reflector (translucent or painted in titanium). LED-RGB – direct lighting optionally: 42–57 W TC-TELI. 85 W QL.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 69 . 60–250 W QT 32. prismatic reflector and metal reflector (also available in titanium-painted finish) www. no-tool electrical installation on plug-in terminal in place – twist and lock mechanism makes closing luminaire easy The Lighting Handbook Models: – indirect lighting optionally: 22 W T-R 5.One unit – a variety of mounting options: – cord – pendant – chain – adapter – direct installation on the ceiling Installation benefits: – easy and simple installation.zumtobel. 70–150 W HIT. largely without tools – luminaire prewired. laboratories. e. waiting rooms.zumtobel. fully flexible light emission – smooth surfaces. easy to clean – lamp and louvre protected against soiling Design by Studio Ambrozus 70 / Chapter 3 www. workshops.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook Application: – louvre: for high visual requirements in rooms where dust and dirt are present. kitchens. classrooms and nursery schools – opal: circulation areas. easy to clean – excellent maintenance factor PERLUCE louvre – first closed surface-mounted louvre luminaire available on the market – optional colour accents – excellent light output ratio – suitable for high visual requirements – maintenance factor better than in open louvre luminaires – smooth surfaces. g. staircases. wellness areas.PERLUCE – Closed lighting system with excellent maintenance factor Closed surface-mounted luminaire with increased protection type IP 50 (IP 54) PERLUCE Opal – optional colour accents – excellent light output ratio – uniform. changing rooms. nursery schools and canteens . ceiling brightened up by laterally perforated upper reflector – opal: opal optic. UGR < 19 or < 16 acc. even when mounted end to end Models: PERLUCE linear PERLUCE wallwasher PERLUCE square Opal/louvre Opal 1/14 W T16 (IP 50) 1/35 W T16 (IP 54) 2/18 W TC-L (IP 50/54) 1/24 W T16 (IP 50) 1/49 W T16 (IP 54) 4/14 W TC-L (IP 50/54) 1/28 W T16 (IP 50) 1/35 W T16 (IP 50/54) 1/80 W T16 (IP 54) 1/49 W T16 (IP 50/54) 1/54 W T16 (IP 50/54) 2/35 W T16 (IP 54) 1/80 W T16 (IP 50/54) 2/49 W T16 (IP 54) 2/14 W T16 (IP 50) 2/28 W T16 (IP 50) 2/35 W T16 (IP 50) 2/49 W T16 (IP 50/54) Protection type Protection type Protection type IP 50 standard IP 54 standard IP 50 standard (IP 54) (IP 54) The Lighting Handbook www. to EN 12464.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 71 . to EN 12464 Quality: – 1-lamp and 2-lamp models in same housing – excellent light output ratio and homogeneous illumination of luminaire – injection-moulded optic (generally thin luminaire walls) – high stability of optic – end-to-end installation without gaps – luminaries can be opened easily. UGR < 22 or < 25 acc.Lighting technology: – T16 technology with electronic ballast – louvre: Bivergence plus – darklight louvre. reduced luminance levels of L < 1000 cd/m2 at 65°.zumtobel. ballast. low-temperature. PMMA. and stands for impact resistDesigned by Massimo Iosa Ghini S C U B A Shockproof Chemically resistant UV-stable Benefit-orientated Application-orientated ance. CHEMO diffuser. halogen-free wiring The Lighting Handbook www. 684 mm T26 1-/2-lamp 36 W electr. UVstability. 15° slope. optimised prisfaces (recommended for food matic structure industry) – innovative sealing rim between – optionally with heavy-duty electronic ballast for longer basic housing and diffuser service life at high ambient – special CHEMO diffuser temperatures (combines benefits of PC and PMMA) Product range with PC.294 mm/1. Benefits: – unique. 1.594 mm T16 1-lamp 54/80 W. high-temperature and lowtemperature versions) and a unique.zumtobel. low-loss ballast. in various IP 65 applications (dust-proof and jet-proof).294 mm T26 1-/2-lamp 58 W electr.594 mm Special designs (available upon request): SCII. SCUBA is the successor of FZ and IFP.SCUBA – Moisture-proof diffuser luminaire with impressive problem-solving skills Moisture-proof diffuser luminaire boasting impressive problem-solving skills (SCII. 1. Materials use are optionally PC. chemical resistance. 72 / Chapter 3 emergency lighting. PMMA.com/productsites . ballast. hightemperature. innovative design language (oval.294 mm/1. and polyester (GRP) for the basic housing. plastic catches. innovative design – smooth/ergonomic surfaces language and catches – high light output ratio thanks – 15° slope of all visible surto calculated. ballast. 1.594 mm T16 1-/2-lamp 28/35/49 W. low-loss ballast. PC. aerodynamic). PMMA or CHEMO diffuser: T26 1-/2-lamp 18 W electr. low-loss ballast. 1. plastic catches. heavyduty electronic ballast. user-friendliness and application-orientation. CHEMO for diffusers. at 32 °C max. at 35 °C max. PC industry 1/58 W.000 60. 1/36 W. Measured values refer to ambient temperature.000 30. at 59 °C max. at 47 °C max. taking the SCUBA luminaire as an example Reliability SCUBA + standard electronic ballast SCUBA with PC industry: same service life at higher temperature SCUBA with PC industry: double service life at the same temperature 90 % 95 % 100 % 0 10. 1/36 W. without through-wiring. to a limited extent Polymethylmethacrylate (PMMA) – 100 % UV-resistant – good chemical resistance – impact absorbing UV-resistance 30 25 20 15 10 CHEMO – extremely UV-resistant.000 50.000 service life (h) The Lighting Handbook Standard electronic ballast 1/58 W.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 73 . at 38 °C max.000 20. All T16 and T26 models ensure a long service life. 2/58 W. at 35 °C max. PC industry 1/58 W. 2/58 W. at 38 °C max. 2/36 W. comparable to PMMA – substantial resistance to a large number of chemicals – impact resistance similar to PC Yellowness Index PC with UV-stabiliser PMMA and CHEMO 5 0 Weathering time (months) 60 80 100 120 Heavy-duty electronic ballasts The PC industry product range was specially designed for use in harsh industrial environments. 2/36 W.000 70. at 47 °C max. www. 1/36 W.000 100.Properties of diffuser materials: Polycarbonate (PC) – UV-stabilised – extremely impact-resistant – chemically resistant.000 90. at 32 °C max. at 50 °C max. even under tough environmental conditions.000 80. at 47 °C max. at 45 °C max.000 40.zumtobel. Comparison of service life of a PC industry ballast compared with a standard electronic ballast. 2/36 W. 2/58 W. Subtract 7 °C in case of through-wiring. and have been given the ENEC mark for their rugged.zumtobel. durable design.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook . In industry and engineering – electronics – electrical engineering – micromechanics – biogenetics – pharmaceutical and chemical companies – laboratory technology – genetic engineering – food technology – extremely critical areas of food production – food industry – hallway and corridor areas – laundries and large-scale catering establishments 74 / Chapter 3 www.CLEAN – Three-level luminaire concept for clean-rooms CLEAN – an overview Model CLEAN Supreme CLEAN Advanced CLEAN Classic Designs Installation Protection type type Square Linear Usable space Ceiling Surface• IP 65 IP 65 mounted • • • • Recessed Recessed IP 65 IP 54 IP 54 IP 20 All luminaires boast a highquality surface finish resistant to cleaning agents and Application: In healthcare settings – operating theatres – laboratories – air locks – intensive care units – emergency wards – examination and treatment rooms – recovery rooms – hallway and corridor areas – administrative areas – laundries and kitchens – doctors’ surgeries – healthcare and rehabilitation centres disinfectants. CLEAN Supreme – IPA certificate for clean-room compatibility in clean-rooms in Classes 3 to 9 (ISO).com/productsites Chapter 3 / 75 . convenient relamping CLEAN Advanced – IPA certificate for clean-room compatibility in clean-rooms in Classes 3 to 9 (ISO).zumtobel. continuous glass diffuser – trouble-free operation in rooms with positive and negative pressure containment systems thanks to special valve system – easy installation of luminaires. issued by the Fraunhofer Institute – antistatic surface finish – frameless. issued by the Fraunhofer Institute – cover made of anodised aluminium – models with toughened safety glass or shatter-proof PMMA acrylic glass – trouble-free operation in rooms with positive and negative pressure containment systems thanks to special valve system – extremely resistant materials – easy installation of luminaires. and high-quality workmanconvenient relamping ship CLEAN Classic – cover made of anodised aluminium – model with PMMA acrylic glass – extremely resistant materials and high-quality workmanship The Lighting Handbook www. com/productsites The Lighting Handbook Safety: – emergency lighting can be – “crash channel” provides integrated light if controller fails – ZUMTOBEL ONLITE separate – quick and easy replacement. no experts needed – direct connection via Ethernet (TCP/IP) – transparency of costs from design through to operation – can be upgraded using standard Luxmate bus components – 4 control points included – no addressing of luminaires.– dimmer with autoprotect toring in case of networking facility (overload protection for lighting loads) . except for RGBW (DALI Broadcast) Intuitive: – clear design layout and functions of control units – self-explanatory symbols Emotion: – lighting scenes – dynamism and controlled colour changes ZBOX-Controller: W: 372 mm H: 372 mm D: 60 mm ZBOX-Cxx: W: 86 mm H: 86 mm D 11 mm – control concept completely focused on guest – “ZBOX does what guests expect” – day and night scenes (networked with Luxmate add-on module: radio-controlled clock) 76 / Chapter 3 www.zumtobel. private dwellings and shops Plug&Play – pre-addressed and pre-programmed for hotel rooms – plug-in connections – locally as stand-alone system. battery luminaires – preferably no special skills required NT3 versions with central moni. or networked with Luxmate bus – web tool for fine adjustment – no licence.ZBOX – Plug&Play Lighting control system for hotels. no special skills required. no DALI addressing.g.7 W The Lighting Handbook www.Main functions: – scenes and individual adjustment – special control concept – functions adjustable via ZBOX.NIGHTLOGIC day/night scenes (various scenes are called up depending on the time of day) Pros: – energy savings – through lighting scenes at reduced cost lighting levels savings – operating costs – dimming increases service life of incandescent lamps longer maintenance cycles cost savings – fast – thanks to pre-addressing and plug-in connectors – do it yourself using the ZBOX. 100 %) – 1 x output (300 W) for RGBW control of wellness luminaire (DALI group numbers 1– 4.WEBTOOL – mains cut-off device – backup function with SD card (under development) – ZBOX. max.WEBTOOL – package optimised for workflow on site Technical data: – 8 x output (300 W) – switchable via relay – dimmable via DALI Broadcast (all electronic ballasts connected are dimmed simultaneously. potentialfree – 1 x Luxmate bus connection (1 bus load) – 1 x RJ45 Ethernet LAN connection for web tool and service – 1 x SD card for backup/ restore (under development) – ZBOX DIMMER300: light on 0. max. light off 1 W (stand-alone = full standby) 4.5 W (networked = half standby) – 5 x input for DALI ZBOX Circle control unit – multiple allocation (e.zumtobel. of 10 DALI loads) – slot for 300 VA universal dimmer (20–300 VA.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 77 .. 16 DALI loads) – 1 x output for 1 blinds/ curtain motor 230 V-AC Energy loss: – ZBOX Controller: light on 10 W (no dimmer). 0 .. 1 x left bed + 1 x right bed + 2 x room + 2 x bathroom + 2 x hall) – 2 x input “Key Card” and “Aux” – 230 V-AC. NSI Supplied via LPS system (communication via Power Line) DALI Supplied via CPS system (communication via DALI) 230 V AC NT 1/3 auto test – no DALI bus connected – fixed test cycle programmes are run automatically. The respective type of supply is indicated by the luminaire’s name: NT 1/3 Separate battery supply with auto test and control test function (1 and 3 h stand-alone time) An attractive design and the use of high-quality materials guarantee not only maximum functionality and reliability. displayed via bicoloured LED – low installation effort 230 V AC SB 128 Controller 78 / Chapter 3 www.zumtobel.ONLITE escape sign and emergency luminaires – Combining design and functionality All ONLITE escape sign luminaires are based on first-class lighting technology. unobtrusive integration with the interior design. Each ONLITE escape sign can be supplied via three different systems. but also pleasant. This ensures that pictograms are uniformly illuminated at a minimum luminance level of 200 cd/m2. functional reliability .com/productsites The Lighting Handbook DALI control line NT 1/3 control test DALI bus connected: luminaires centrally monitored – individual configuration/ monitoring of luminaires – minimum testing effort – fully automatic test log book – max. com/productsites Chapter 3 / 79 . – every DALI luminaire can be used as an emergency luminaire – minimum maintenance effort – interference-free data communication – no installation of additional monitoring modules in luminaires required – security function of final circuit (makes sure that luminaires can be switched on reliably if communication line is defective) The Lighting Handbook Design by Matteo Thun with Lutz Büsing www.NSI – supply via LPS Communication with luminaires with PLC (power line control) via supply line.zumtobel. diesel generator or 2nd mains. Monitored via DALI interface. – maximum intrinsic safety thanks to self-contained systems – easy maintenance – low installation effort – reduced fire load – can be fully integrated into lighting management system DALI – supplied via CPS Supply via CPS. All luminaires can be individually controlled and monitored. 1. – Ideal light distribution thanks to optimum illumination. Strain relief devices and covers fixed without tools ensure quick. Completely independent from general lighting. Power input in non-maintained mode approx. RESCLITE paves the way to a new era of emergency lighting.zumtobel.5 mm². Only a very small number of luminaires are required for emergency lighting in conformity with relevant standards.ONLITE RESCLITE – A world champion in terms of lighting technology and energy efficiency With a Power LED and three sophisticated optics. Standard installation terminals for throughwiring up to 2. Surface-mounted on ceiling TECTON continuous-row lighting system The Lighting Handbook 80 / Chapter 3 www.5 W. – Minimum energy consumption and maximum installed load of 5 W.com/productsites . The only design work needed is the placing of spacing tables. – Extremely easy to install and maintain. Mounting options Recessed into ceiling – Minimum design effort. straightforward installation. This means that only very small-scale supply and cable systems are needed. 3 Max.8 – Reflection factors: 0 – Complies with glare reduction acc.4 15.0 5.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 81 .7 8.zumtobel.1 6. DALI) b Emergency power supply via separate battery for 3 hours (NT3)) – Width of escape route: 2 m – Minimum illuminance across width 1 m: 1 lx – Uniformity higher than 40 : 1 – Maintenance factor considered: 0.4 12.0 4.1 7.RESCLITE escape LED emergency luminaire for escape route lighting according to EN 1838 Mounting height in m h 2.4 7.7 6.1 7.9 5. spacing (m) wall/luminaire a1 b1 5.0 19.2 2.6 14.5 3.5 22.5 2.9 14.0 Max.9 h a2 b2 a1 b1 a Emergency power supply via separate battery for 1 hour (NT1) and central battery (NSI.5 18. spacing (m) luminaire/luminaire a2 b2 13.7 19.4 6. to EN 1838 The Lighting Handbook www.0 16. 5 lx – Uniformity higher than 40 : 1 – maintenance factor considered: 0.RESCLITE anti-panic LED emergency luminaire for anti-panic lighting according to EN 1838 Mounting height in m h 2. spacing (m) luminaire/luminaire a2 b2 9.4 10.4 – rotationally symmetrical distribution – minimum illuminance: 0.9 11.1 10.9 0. spacing (m) wall/luminaire a1 b1 3.1 9.5 3.1 3.6 1.0 4.5 3.9 0.6 12.2 2. DALI) b Emergency power supply via separate battery for 3 hours (NT3) 82 / Chapter 3 www.zumtobel.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook .3 8.5 11.7 Max.5 0.0 Max.8 h a2 b2 a1 b1 – Reflection factors: 0 – Complies with glare reduction acc.5 12.2 2.9 10. to EN 1838 a1 b1 a2 b2 a2 b2 a1 b1 a Emergency power supply via separate battery for 1 hour (NT1) and via central battery (NSI.1 3.0 5.4 3. fire-fighting and reporting facilities: Mounting height in m h 2.7 2.4 2.0 5.3 3.1 2.5 3. to EN 1838 – maintenance factor considered: 0.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 83 . b The Lighting Handbook a Emergency power supply via separate battery for 1 hour (NT1) and via central battery (NSI.0 4.8 – – rotationally symmetrical distri.– reflection factors: 0 bution – complies with glare reduc– minimum illuminance: 5 lx tion acc. to EN 1838 Min.7 2.0 Ø of light cone in m Øa Øb 2.zumtobel.8 h Ø a. DALI) b Emergency power supply via separate battery for 3 hours (NT3) www.RESCLITE spot LED emergency luminaire for increased illuminance levels acc. illuminance level of 5 lx s for first-aid. b Ø a.0 2. 6 m 5) The Lighting Handbook www.Cord Wallclass range mounted suspension mounted source type on ceiling 90° wallmounted Recessed TECTON ONLITE LOOK product overview 84 / Chapter 3 RESCLITE LED IP 40 cV s ARTSIGN LED IP 20 cs 15 m 3) ERGOSIGN T16 8 W IP 40 410 Lm cs 15 m 3) 7.com/productsites PROOFSIGN LED LED IP 65 1) cs 20 m 3) COMSIGN T16 8 W IP 20 410 Lm cs 28 m 3) 15 m 4) .Type SurfaceLight Protection Protection Recognition mounted Pendant.zumtobel. com/productsites 2) 1) with cable feed only 2) reduced to IP 40 3) acc. VkF and SN EN 1838 (model for CH) 5) narrow side if mounted on the ceiling 3) ECOSIGN safety T16 8 W IP 65 1) 410 Lm s wc 3) Chapter 3 / 85 CUBESIGN TC-DEL IP 40 1/26 W cs 90 m 45 m 4) .zumtobel.The Lighting Handbook COMSIGN II LED IP 20 cs 28 m 3) 15 m 4) PURESIGN LED IP 40 cs 30 m 3) 15 m 4) ECOSIGN T16 8 W IP 65 1) 410 Lm s 32 m wc 16 m 4) 2) www. to EN 1838 and DIN 4844 2) 4) lt. telecommunication and data sockets – optional connection to medical supply systems. 86 / Chapter 3 www. call system. if medical gases are needed. BELIA provides precise examination lighting for care personnel and glare-free reading light for patients. Multifunctional types of lighting and innovative longitudinal glare control provide ample evidence of BELIA’s efficiency and photometric qualities. giving them a feeling of privacy.zumtobel. for instance. Design by NPK Industrial Design Application: – medically used rooms without high supply requirements – rehabilitation centres and nursing homes – homes for the elderly Designs: – single-bed luminaire with 580 mm mounting channel for flush integration of safety sockets.BELIA – Single-bed luminaire Living-room ambience for medically used rooms As a single-bed luminaire that can optionally be fitted with supply modules.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook . 1500 mm 188 www.zumtobel. 1390 mm L (plus night lighting): 1200 mm.One luminaire – four lighting scenes: Room lighting Examination lighting Reading light Night lighting The Lighting Handbook L (reading light + room lighting): 1090 mm.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 87 100 . Thanks to three independent lighting elements. the supply components are flexibly integrated. Colours for the basic unit and lighting dormer can be chosen personally. medical gases 128 162 60 228 88 / Chapter 3 www.TETTOIA – Medical supply unit Flexibility in a pleasantly smooth design TETTOIA boasts plenty of scope for action. Design by NPK Industrial Design Application: – medically used rooms wit high supply requirements – patient rooms Modular systems: – supply unit boasts flexibility in terms of both design and technology – built-in lighting unit for general. examination and night lighting – nursing rooms – optional supply of mainspower components. communication and data sockets. reading. the direct/indirect luminaire provides perfect light for any situation – at the press of a button and featuring convenient reset mechanisms. This means that both patient and doctor are provided with perfect convenience.zumtobel.com/productsites The Lighting Handbook 32 . The Lighting Handbook Supply components can be installed on the front and also on the underside.zumtobel. www. Freedom of choice for colours of basic unit and lighting dormer.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 89 . easy-to-clean closed designs.One luminaire – four lighting scenes: Room lighting Examination lighting Reading light Night lighting Prismatic diffuser for glare-free room lighting. . . . . . . . . . . Lamp descriptions acc. . . . . . . . . . . Lamp characteristics. . . . . . . metal halide lamps . . . . . . . . . Application notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . Application notes. . . . Power consumption. . . . . . . . . . 2 3–4 5 – 10 11 – 14 15 16 – 17 18 19 – 20 21 – 23 24 – 28 29 30 31 32 – 36 . . . . The main lamp types . . . . . . . . . . . compact fluorescent lamps . Overview of electronic ballasts. . . . . Characteristic values of the major lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . to LBS (ZVEI) . energy savings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Characteristics of metal halide lamps 250 + 400 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A comparison of fluorescent lamps – T16/T26 . . . Overview of LED control gear. .Chapter 4 Lamps and ballasts Lamp selection . . . . . . . . . T16 fluorescent lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . required power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Energy efficiency of luminaires . . . despite their low purchase price. Lamp characteristics can essentially be specified by the following key terms: Luminous flux/ efficiency Service life Light colour Colour rendition Drop in luminous flux Lamp characteristics Burning position Lamp power Warm-up time Re-start time Dimming capability The Lighting Handbook . apart from having a short service life. However.Choosing the right lamp – An important first decision Choosing the right lamp depends on what is required of the lighting (see Chapter 2). these lamps generate only little light. Therefore. For instance. In other situations. energy-efficient and environmentally compatible alternatives must be used increasingly in the future. users happily tolerate the higher purchase price of discharge lamps because their high luminous efficiency and long lifetime make them economic. incandescent lamps are still the most popular lighting option used in domestic areas to help create that cosy atmosphere. Thus it is part of the expertise of the lighting designer to find the most suitable lamp for a lighting task. It is affected by the red and blue colour components in the spectrum. The ratio of luminous flux to electrical power consumption gives the luminous efficiency [lm/W]. they are shown as maintenance factors (LLWF). 6.Lamp characteristics 1. the better the colour rendition in comparison with the optimum reference light. 4. Colour rendition The spectral components of the light determine how well various object colours can be reproduced. This test is subject to standardised operating conditions. In Chapter 8. being the time by which statistically half the lamps are still working (mortality). Lamp manufacturers display this drop in luminous flux by curves. 5. tw = cool). Power The electrical power consumption of the lamp as opposed to the power consumption of a system comprising lamp and ballast. they are shown as maintenance factors (LSF). due to the ageing of its chemical and physical components. or the lower the colour rendition group number. 3. The higher the colour rendition index (Ra or CRI). The Lighting Handbook Chapter 4 / 3 . The rated luminous flux is measured at a standardised measurement temperature of 25 °C in units of lumen [lm]. 2. Drop in luminous flux The initial luminous flux of a new lamp decreases over its time of operation (lumen maintenance). In Chapter 8. Service life The average service life is normally specified. Lamp manufacturers display this failure rate by curves. or half the lamps have failed. Luminous flux/luminous efficiency The luminous flux specifies the total amount of light generated by a lamp. Light colour The light colour describes the colour impression made by a white light source as relatively warm (ww = warm) or relatively cool (nw = intermediate. The system luminous efficiency also includes the power consumption of the ballast. 7. Compact fluorescent lamps may usually be used in any burning position. Warm-up time Discharge lamps in particular need between 30 seconds and several minutes to warm up and output the full luminous flux. nowadays all fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps can also be dimmed over almost any range. temperature curve may vary with the position.and mercury-vapour lamps can be varied. only certain burning positions are allowed so as to avoid unstable operating states. 10. Burning position Manufacturers specify the permitted burning positions for their lamps. The power of highpressure sodium. Metal halide lamps. Re-start High-pressure discharge lamps need to cool down for several minutes before they can be started again. For some metal halide lamps. important properties such as the luminous flux vs. Dimming capability Besides incandescent and halogen incandescent lamps. The new series of special models for indoor and outdoor applications constitute an exception. however. however. 8. but only in discrete levels. are still not approved by the manufacturers for dimming. because this may have uncontrollable effects on light quality and lamp service life. 9. 4 / Chapter 4 The Lighting Handbook . just as in incandescent lamps.The main lamp types QR-CBC QT12 QR111 H a l o g e n l a m p s QT32 QT-DE QPAR51 QPAR64 Halogen lamps – For mains and low-voltage – Brilliant light operation – Excellent colour rendition – Longer service life and – Applications: retail higher luminous efficiency and domestic areas. The Lighting Handbook Chapter 4 / 5 . than incandescent lamps restaurants and – Easy to dim catering How they work Current flows through a filament and heats it up. These lamps therefore generate a relatively large amount of heat. The halogen cycle increases the efficiency and extends the service life compared with traditional incandescent lamps. but do require a transformer. Low-voltage types are very small and are ideal for precise direction of light. restaurants – Extensive range of types and catering – Dimmable The Lighting Handbook How they work These lamps are compact versions of the linear or circular fluorescent lamps. This radiation is converted into high-quality visible light in the fluorescent material. The luminous flux depends on the burning position and temperature. and operate in a very similar way. 6 / Chapter 4 . The lamps need a starting aid and a current limiting device.l a m p s T16/T26 T16-R T16-R F l u o re s c e n t Fluorescent lamps – High to very high luminous efficiency (in particular T16 HE) – Good to excellent colour rendition – Long service life – Extensive range of types – Dimmable – Application: economically efficient widearea lighting How they work An alternating electric field generates invisible UV radiation between the two electrodes in the discharge tube. The luminous flux is highly dependent on the ambient temperature. f l u o re s c e n t l a m p s TC-DEL TC-TEL(I) TC-TEL(I) TC-L C o m p a c t Compact fluorescent lamps – Compact designs – Applications: commer– High luminous efficiency cial and high-profile – Excellent colour rendition interiors. usually combined in an electronic ballast. lamps HIT-TC-CE HIT-CE HIT-DE-CE HIT-DE HIE HIT Metal halide lamps – High luminous efficiency – Good to excellent colour rendition – High colour stability for ceramic discharge-tube lamps halide Metal – Cannot be dimmed – Applications: industrial bays. The composition of the materials in the tube determines the light quality. spotlighting. The Lighting Handbook Chapter 4 / 7 . A starter is needed to switch on the lamp. retail areas How they work In metal halide lamps. and the current must be limited by a ballast. floodlighting. Practical electronic ballasts are also available for low-power lamps. a highly compact electric arc is produced in a discharge tube. so the light is yellowish and only suitable for special applications. although it provides a far poorer light quality. The colour-improved SDW lamp by Philips is a popular choice for lighting retail areas. and the current must be limited by a ballast. A starter is usually needed to switch on the lamp. . street lighting HME Mercury vapour lamps 8 / Chapter 4 The Lighting Handbook How they work The high-pressure mercury vapour lamp is actually the forerunner to the modern metal halide lamp. and so only need a ballast for current limiting. Mercury vapour lamps – No starter.va p o u r Sodium vapour lamps – High luminous efficiency and long service life – Satisfactory to poor colour rendition – Can be dimmed in discrete steps – Applications: industrial bays. street lighting HST-CRI HSE HST l a m p s S o d i u m Colour-improved (Philips SDW): – Excellent colour rendition – Warm light – Long service life – Application: retail areas How they work The discharge in the linearly extended ceramic discharge tube is defined by sodium. The lamps can be started at mains voltage. just ballast required – Satisfactory to poor colour rendition – Can be dimmed in discrete steps – Applications: industrial bays. indoor and outdoor public areas l a m p s How they work A high-frequency electromagnetic field is coupled into the glass bulb via an antenna protruding into the bulb. Systems have a very long service life because the only parts subject to wear are in these ballasts. commercial and industrial interiors. As yet there are no dimmable electronic ballasts available. 85 W and 165 W – Excellent colour rendition – Very long service life – Rotationally symmetrical light distribution – Applications: areas where it is difficult to replace lamps. The Lighting Handbook Chapter 4 / 9 . The amalgam technology used in these lamps makes their luminous flux only very slightly temperature-dependent. just as in fluorescent lamps.LMG-IHf I n d u c t i o n QL – By Philips only – 55 W. The lamps can only be operated using special electronic ballasts by Philips. retail. This produces UV radiation which is then converted into visible light by fluorescent material. L i g h t 10 / Chapter 4 The Lighting Handbook . The LEDs’ very long service life of several 10. Rapid increases in efficiency at a simultaneous fall in prices open up bright perspectives for the future. visual guidance systems. White light can only be produced using fluorescent materials from blue LEDs or by mixing RGB. in which radiation is produced. showcase and shelf lighting How they work Light emitting diodes are modern semiconductor devices.000 hours can only be achieved when overheating is avoided (thermal management). Today. LED modules are supplied with power via appropriate converters with safety extra-low voltage. escape sign luminaires.ATCO) e m i t t i n g d i o d e s ( L E D s ) Light emitting diodes (LEDs) – Each manufacturer uses own technology – Highly efficient direct generation of coloured light – Huge potential as the light source of the future – Applications: decorative indoor and outdoor applications.Wire bond Bubble LED chip Board LED (EOS P214 by TRIDONIC. The active semiconductor layer. Their properties are determined by the materials used as well as the mechanical design. They can be dimmed easily. the smallest chips have a side length of approx. is sandwiched between a positive and a negative substrate. a large variety of different colours are produced directly. innovative lighting solutions. Depending on the materials used. 250 μm (1 micrometre = 1 one-thousandth of a millimetre). backlighting of advertising signs. The rated luminous flux is generally specified for an ambient temperature of 25 °C. The maximum value is obtained at an optimum ambient temperature. with losses increasing at higher and lower temperatures.Application notes T16 fluorescent lamps In comparison with thicker T26 lamps (diameter: 26 mm). The T16 basically follows the same curve as the T26. but typically at one end of the tube where the manufacturer has fixed its seal. the maximum value therefore lies above this rated value. Thus luminaire efficiencies may have levels greater than “1”. 1. Reason: The cool spot of T16 is not located in the centre of the lamp. % 100 80 60 40 20 T26 36 W T26 58 W T16 -20 0 20 40 60 80 °C Ambient temperature The Lighting Handbook Chapter 4 / 11 . modern T16 lamps (diameter: 16 mm) show several different properties that must be taken into account for application. Luminous flux – temperature curve As for all fluorescent lamps. but the maximum occurs not at an ambient temperature of 20 to 25 °C but at about 35 °C. the lamp’s luminous flux is temperature-dependent. For the T16. the luminous flux produced is therefore increased by 50 % and the number of luminaires required is reduced by one third. the so-called Cool Spot Optimizer (CSO) may be used. the lamps’ luminous flux is also affected. an appropriately adjusted planned luminous flux has to be calculated. For lighting design purposes. CSO – Cool Spot Optimizer The photometric data of luminaires typically apply to a standard temperature of 25 °C. 60 % LB approx.2. The CSO may only be used in conventional T16 28/54 W and/or 35/49/80 W lamps using cold-spot technology. In order to increase the efficiency of luminaires fitted with T16 lamps. and must be fitted at the lamp end (see picture). the luminous flux declines in particular at lower temperatures. In fluorescent lamps. Example: FZ 1/54 without CSO at 0 °C FZ 1/54 with CSO at 0 °C approx. owing to the CSO. Where a different ambient temperature prevails. The CSO effects a temperature increase at the lamp by approx. 90 % LB In the above example. 10 to 20 degrees. resulting in a corresponding shift to the left of the T16 curve displayed (page 11). 12 / Chapter 4 The Lighting Handbook . even exhibiting flickering at low dimming levels. in multi-lamp luminaires they should lie next to each other. and where lamps are positioned vertically. This is the period immediately after the lamps are switched on for the first time. before assessing a lighting installation’s illuminance level and lighting quality using already aged lamps. when the initially encapsulated mercury is vaporised and evenly distributed in the lamp. it matters how one or more lamps are fitted in the luminaires. This may have a negative impact on the lamp service life. In general.e. one should allow a period of 2 to 4 days of operation without dimming or switching. particularly in dimming installations. 4. these should be burnt in over a minimum period of 30–60 minutes without dimming or switching them. Also. To ensure perfect operation. For cool environments.3. Ageing/burning in Brand new lamps stabilise during the ageing phase. Lamp orientation Owing to the two electrodes (tube ends) not being identical in design. Unstabilised lamps may differ in brightness and light colour. they should preferably also be at the bottom. lamp ends should always have the same orientation i. single-lamp normal ambient temperature multi-lamp cool ambient temperature The Lighting Handbook Chapter 4 / 13 . it may make sense – depending on the type of luminaire – to arrange the lamp/s differently. if possible. however. This enables to compensate for the dark zone at the lamp’s ends. In order to provide for maximum uniformity.and twin-lamp The Lighting Handbook . should be turned so as to make the lamp end head towards the centre of the luminaire. the maximum total luminous flux will be achieved if the lamp ends are placed next to each other. single. For cool environments. it is recommended to also align all lamps identically. single-lamp twin-lamp In a continous-row lighting system. here too it may make sense to arrange the lamp/s differently. The so-called TETRIS arrangement provides for lamps overlapping several centimetres.and twin-lamp 14 / Chapter 4 single. The last lamp/s.Further details for TETRIS and continuous row arrangements: Particular attention is needed for special lamp arrangements like in TETRIS (TECTON or SLOT luminaires) or in continous-row lighting systems. A comparison of fluorescent lamps – T16/T26 Advantages of T16 fluorescent lamps – Reduction in the lamp diameter by about 40 % – Higher optical efficiencies possible – Improved luminous efficiency – Improved luminaire efficiencies from the shift in the luminous-flux peak – Standardised luminance levels for all lamp lengths for high-efficiency lamps – Larger range of types makes it easier to meet lighting requirements more closely Summary type comparison (selection): T16 Length Power Rated luminous flux (25 °C) 549 mm 14 W 1200 lm 24 W 1750 lm 849 mm 21 W 1900 lm 39 W 3100 lm 1149 mm 28 W 2600 lm 54 W 4450 lm 1449 mm 35 W 3300 lm 49 W 4300 lm 80 W 6150 lm T26 Length Power Rated luminous flux (25 °C) 590 mm 18 W 1350 lm 895 mm 30 W 1200 mm 36 W 1500 mm 58 W 2350 lm 3350 lm 5200 lm Example of interior lighting using T16 and T26 Room dimensions: length = 8 m. width = 6 m. ballast Option 1 2/36 W Number of luminaires 8 Max. walls = 50 %. height = 3 m Reflection factors: ceiling = 70 %. ballast Option 2: SPHEROS ind/direct luminaire. matt louvre.0 W/m2/100 lx 91 % 73 % 10 % The Lighting Handbook Chapter 4 / 15 . 2/36 W electr. matt louvre. 2/28 W electr. lamp luminous efficiency 93 lm/W Power consumption per m2 per 100 lx 2. floor = 20 % Required maintenance value of illuminance: 500 lx Option 1: SPHEROS ind/direct luminaire.2 W/m2/100 lx Luminaire efficiency 85 % Utilization factor 66 % Energy saving Option 2 2/28 W 8 104 lm/W 2. ensuring that more than 90 % of the maximum luminous flux is achieved over a wide temperature range of approx. Above and below this range.Application notes Compact fluorescent lamps 1. +5 to +70 °C. DULUX T/E • • • • • Philips 2-pin PL-T 2p Philips 4-pin PL-T 4p GE 2-pin BIAX T Sylvania 2-pin Lynx CF-T • • • • • • • • • • • • • • with amalgam TC-TI. The tables provide an overview of those major manufacturers’ lamps in the TC-T design (three-fold double tube) that have added amalgam. This helps to somewhat mitigate the sharp drop at higher or lower temperatures. the light level still falls off sharply. TC-TELI. TC-QELI 13 W 18 W 26 W 32 W 42 W 57 W 60 W 70 W 85 W 120 W Osram 2-pin DULUX T IN Osram 4-pin DULUX T/E IN DULUX HO CONSTANT Philips 2-pin PL-T TOP 2p Philips 4-pin PL-T TOP 4p PL-H GE 4-pin BIAX T/E BIAX Q/E Sylvania 4-pin Lynx CF-TE • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • The Lighting Handbook • • • • 16 / Chapter 4 . Amalgam lamps The strong temperature dependence of the luminous flux of traditional fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps can be compensated by adding amalgam (mercury compound). however. TC-TE models can be 13 W 18 W 26 W 32 W 42 W 57 W found in the Osram 2-pin DULUX T • • • T16 and TC-L Osram 4-pin designs. Other amalgam without amalgam TC-T. in which the electrodes are arranged diagonally. the cool spot lies in the lamp base. Standard types have a cool spot in the exposed lamp bend.2. The exception to this is the PHILIPS PL-T. so that self-heating and convection may lead to a temperature rise here. In amalgam lamps. Luminaire efficiency can be maximised by fitting the lamps properly in the luminaires. that lamp side on which adjacent tubes are not connected should be placed uppermost – these are the two tube ends containing the internal electrodes.g. In compact luminaires with horizontal lamp arrangement (e. it is therefore recommended to fit the lamps with electrodes uppermost wherever possible. Since the lamp end does not allow consistent identification of the electrode position. downlights). Either possible orientation of these lamps is equivalent. The Lighting Handbook Chapter 4 / 17 . Lamp orientation The luminous flux from compact fluorescent lamps is highly dependent on the burning position. outer protective coating). With these high-pressure discharge lamps in particular. integral safety tube. 3. Some lamps are therefore approved for operation both with ballasts for metal halide lamps (e. The maintenance factor tables in Chapter 8 contain some typical values. Continued use may lead to damage of lamps and control gear and consequently of luminaires! 18 / Chapter 4 The Lighting Handbook .g. Service life characteristics The average lamp service life (lamp survival factor) and the reduction in luminous flux (lamp luminous flux maintenance factor) can vary markedly in some of the different lamp types.g. Once again the detailed data from the manufacturer must be taken into account.g. COPA I 1/400 HSE). COPA I 1/400 HIE) and with ballasts for high-pressure sodium vapour lamps (e. It is the manufacturer’s responsibility to decide whether to permit individual lamp types to be used in uncovered luminaires. Glass covers In general. resulting in different electrical operating values. The detailed information from the manufacturer must be observed without fail. They also depend on the switching frequency and the position of use.Application notes Metal halide lamps 1. it is important to replace the lamps at the designated end of their service life (maintenance interval) at the latest. The higher operating current then leads to higher luminous flux levels for the same lamps together with a slightly altered light quality. Suitable safety devices are installed in the lamps for this purpose (e. Ballasts The manufacturers of metal halide lamps use a range of operating principles. In both cases suitable starters are required. metal halide lamps require a glass cover to protect people and property in the event of the lamp exploding. 2. 000 h 12.000 h 6.000 h See maintenance factors in Chapter 8 “Calculation of economic efficiency” not permitted not permitted 18.100 lm Colour temperature 5.300 K 3.700 K 4. For reliable information and data on other lamp types.200 K 5.800 lm 3. .400 K 4.000 lm 20.000 K 70 70 65 All data subject to change.The Lighting Handbook OSRAM HQI-E HQI-E/P HQI-T 250 W/D Tube mini G 22 any no 20.000 lm 24.000 K 90 Chapter 4 / 19 25.500 lm 25.000 K 89 25.000 K/5. flux Ellipsoid E 40 any no Ellipsoid E 40 any yes Tube E 40 any no Ellipsoid E 40 any no Tube E 40 any no 12.700 K 4.500 lm 25.000 h 12.000 h 20.000 h Design Base Burning position Approved for operation in uncovered luminaires Average service life Reduction in lumin.200 K 5.500 K/6.000 h 12.500 lm 3.000 lm 18.000 K Colour rendition 90 90 90 88 index Ra 24.500 lm 4.000 lm 20. please refer to the manufacturer’s data.000 h Ellipsoid E 40 pendant ±15° no Ellipsoid E40 pendant ±15° yes 250 W/D 250 W/D PHILIPS HCI-E HCI-T HCI-TM HPI-PLUS HPI-Plus HPI-T PLUS POWERBALL POWERBALL POWERBALL 745/767 BU 745/767 BU-P 645 250 W/WDL 250 W/WDL 250 W/WDL 250 W 250 W 250 W Tube E 40 pendant ±20° no 20.500 K 70 70 65 Characteristics of metal halide lamps 250 W Operation with metal-halide lamp ballast (HI) Luminous flux not permitted not permitted not permitted not permitted Colour temperature Colour rendition index Ra Operation with high-pressure sodium-vapour lamp ballast (HS) Luminous flux 19.000 lm 17.000 lm 4.000 K/5.000 h 12.400 K 4.500 K/6. 100 K 5.500 K 70 65 42.900 K 4.000 lm Colour temperature 5.OSRAM HPI PLUS 400 W 745/767 BU Ellipsoid E40 pendant ±15° no 20.000 h 20.500 lm 30.000 K/5.000 K 70 65 HQI-E HQI-E/P HQI-E HQI-BT HQI-T 400 W/D 400 W/D 400 W/N 400 W/D 400 W/N (clear) Design Base Burning position Approved for operation in uncovered luminaires Average service life Reduction in luminous flux Ellipsoid E40 any no Ellipsoid E40 any yes Ellipsoid E40 any no Tube E40 any no Tube E40 horizontal ±45° no 12.000 h 12.500 lm 4.000 lm 4.000 lm 4. please refer to the manufacturer’s data.700 K 6.800 K 70 70 32.500 K/6.100 K Colour rendition index Ra 90 90 58 90 Operation with high-pressure sodium-vapour lamp ballast (HS) Luminous flux 30.400 K 3. The Lighting Handbook .700 K 4.000 lm 3.000 h 12.700 K 4.000 lm 25.800 K 5.500 lm 35.500 lm 42.000 lm 4.000 h Ellipsoid E40 horizontal ±20° no Ellipsoid E40 pendant ±15° yes Tube E40 horizontal ±20° no PHILIPS HPI PLUS 400 W 743 HOR HPI PLUS 400 W 745/767 BU-P HPI-T PLUS 400 W 645 Characteristics of metal halide lamps 400 W 20 / Chapter 4 32.200 K Colour rendition index Ra 90 90 64 90 39.000 K/5.000 lm 33.400 K 4.500 K/6.000 lm 31.000 lm 27.000 K 4.300 K 70 70 42.000 h 20.000 h See maintenance factors in Chapter 8 “Calculation of economic efficiency” 33.000 lm 35.000 h 12.800 K >65 All data subject to change.500 K 4.000 h 20.000 lm 4.000 h 12.500 lm 35.100 K >60 Operation with metal-halide lamp ballast (HI) Luminous flux 26.000 lm 40.000 lm Colour temperature 5. For reliable information and data on other lamp types. ) Fluorescent lamp Ø 26 mm light colour 830 T8 Polylux XLR F /830 --Electronic Biax Biax S . ballast E27" screw-in cap Compact fluorescent lamp (1 short double tube) only for conventional/low-loss ballast Compact fluorescent lamp (2 double tubes) G24q 4-pin cap for conv. ballasts Compact fluorescent lamp (3 double tubes) amalgam techn. light colour 830 Fluorescent lamp Ø 16 mm blau 14–80 W T16-R(I) 22–60 W FH /840 HE./low-loss/electr.4 Pin Biax T/E . GX24q 4-pin cap Compact fluorescent lamp (1 long double tube) 2G11 4-pin cap Compact fluorescent lamp (1 long double tube) 42G11 4-pin cap amalgam techn.2 pin Biax D/E .4 Pin Biax L . to LBS (ZVEI) – TC-S MASTER PL-C 4 Pin 5–11 W MASTER TL-D Super 80 /830 --MASTER TL-D Xtra/Xtreme DULUX EL E27 MASTER PL Electronic DULUX S MASTER PL-S 2 Pin TC-DEL 10–26 W DULUX D/E TC-TELI 13–70 W DULUX T/E IN a comparison of models and manufacturers’ descriptions TC-L --- 18–80 W DULUX L MASTER PL-T TOP 4 Pin MASTER PL-L 4 Pin Chapter 4 / 21 TC-LI Compact fluorescent lamp (3 double tubes) with integral electr.The Lighting Handbook LBS code Description Philips GE Sylvania System power Osram Fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps T16 /840 Fluorescent lamp Ø 16 mm light colour 840 Starcoat T5 F/T5/840 ----------T5 Luxline Plus FHE/840. FQ /67 HO FC MASTER TL5 HE/HO Super 80/840 MASTER TL5 HO/VHO TOP /830 TL5 HO Coloured Pro MASTER TL5C T26 /830 Fluorescent lamp Ø 16 mm circular (partly amalgam techn. 40–80 W DULUX L CONSTANT . FQ /840 HO FQ /830 HO CONSTANT FH /67 HE. FHO/840 --- 14–80 W T16-I /830 24–120 W T16-bu Fluorescent lamp Ø 16 mm amalgam techn.4 pin --- 15–58 W L /830 T26-LL Fluorescent lamp Ø 26 mm long service life 15–58 W T8 Luxline Plus F /830 --Mini-Lynx T /E27 Lynx-S Lynx-DE Lynx-TE Lynx-LE --- TC-TSE 5–30 W Lamp descriptions acc. 122 mm QPAR51 /GU10 Halogen incandescent lamp for mains 35–50 W voltage..35 --Tubular FR K /Q T3/CL Precise MR16 /CG SUPERIA 50 AR111 12V FL --- --ENDURA CLASSIC A CL CONCENTRA R80 CONCENTRA Standard A55 CL Reflector NR80 PAR38 PAR38 HALOPAR 16 GU10 Twistline Pro Alu HALOLUX CERAM HALOLINE HALOSTAR DECOSTAR Induction lamps LMG-IHf Ball-shaped induction lamp 55–165 W LMG-SIHf Double-tube induction lamp 70–150 W Incandescent and halogen incandescent lamps A60 /c Incandescent GLS lamp Ø 60 mm transp.LBS code GE ----A1/CL/E27 R80/E27 PAR38/E27 Q MR16 HI-SPOT ES 50 DLX-T Tube satin halogen rod Halogen Axial Normal E27 transp. Refl.35 GY6. R80 PAR38 ----- Description Philips Sylvania MASTER QL --- System power Osram Lamp descriptions acc. 20–100 W 12 mm axial filament low-pressure system Low-pressure 12 V QR-CBC51 LV halogen incandescent lamp with 20–65 W cold-light specular reflector Ø 51 mm and glass cover QR111 /24° LV halogen incandescent lamp with 35–100 W reflector Ø 111 mm Radiation angle 24° HALOSPOT 111 FL Aluline Pro 111 24D The Lighting Handbook . with parabolic aluminium reflector Ø 51 mm GU10 cap QT32 /m Halogen incandescent lamp for mains volt. 60–250 W tube-shaped Ø 32 mm frosted outside Halogen incandescent lamp for mains 60–2000 W QT-DE12 voltage. 15–100 W R80 Incandescent reflector lamp Ø 80 mm 40–100 W PAR38 Parabolic incandescent reflector lamp 60–120 W Ø 38/8" = approx. cap at both sides Ø 12 mm QT12-ax-LP LV halogen incandescent lamp Ø approx. to LBS (ZVEI) – a comparison of models and manufacturers’ descriptions 22 / Chapter 4 HalogenA Pro E27 AM Plusline Pro Capsuleline Pro STARLITE Brilliantline Pro Dichroic Q T3/12V GY6. with quartz 70–400 W discharge tube and anti-burst tube for open luminaires HST-CRI GX12 High-pressure sodium-vapour lamp. CDM-TC. with 20–70 W ceramic discharge tube. ellipsoidal. with 35–250 W ceramic discharge tube. 18–180 W tube-shaped Chapter 4 / 23 SOX . tube-shaped. 50–100 W tube-shaped. CDM-Elite-TC MASTER Colour CDM-TD MASTER HPI Plus BU-P ConstantColor CMH /TD/UVC --- --- a comparison of models and manufacturers’ descriptions NAV-T SUPER MASTER SON-T Pro Lucalox LU /HO/T/40 SHP-TS MASTER SOX --SLP Metal halide lamp. reduced UV radiation HIT-TC-CE Metal halide lamp. tube-shaped. compact design HCI-T HCI-TF PB. CMH/TC CMI-TC CMI-TD UVS Britelux HSI-SX/P --ConstantColor CMH /T/UVC CMI-T UVS Arcstream ARC/T HSI-T Kolorlux Standard HSL-BW Description Philips GE Sylvania System power Osram HQL HQI-T High-pressure discharge lamps HME High-pressure mercury-vapour lamp 50–1000 W ellipsoidal HIT Metal halide lamp. tube-shaped.The Lighting Handbook LBS code HPL-N --MASTER Colour CDM-T SuperMini CMH/T. colour-improved. to LBS (ZVEI) – HQI-E/P MASTER SDW-TG --- MASTER Colour CDM-Tm. tube-shaped. GX12 cap HST-MF High-pressure sodium-vapour lamp. increased luminous flux Low-pressure discharge lamps LST Low-pressure sodium-vapour lamp. HCI-TC PB HIT-DE-CE HCI-TS Lamp descriptions acc. with ceramic discharge tube HIE-P Metal halide lamp. cap at 70–250 W both sides. 50–1000 W tube-shaped. with 35–150 W quartz discharge tube HIT-CE UVr Metal halide lamp. nw ww.000 67 12. nw ww.200 1. nw ww. nw ww. nw ww. nw ww.000 16–18 24 27 31–33 39–41 46 54 61 approx.800 3.200 * Lamp service life = mean service life up to 50 % failure (exception: Philips QL up to 10 % failure) The Lighting Handbook . nw ww.350 5.000 87 20–24.000 80 24.300 4. 71 12. nw ww. 77 24.ma g n e t i c l ow. nw ww. nw ww. nw ww. nw ww.000 68 16–20.200 1.850 6.000 90 20–24.400 4.000 74 20–24.450 6. nw ww.000 89 16–20.000 74 24.000 93 20–24. nw ww.000 82 24.100 4. 88 approx. 105 approx. system luLamp service life* minous efficiency in lm/W in h Lamp name Colour rendition Base Colour index Ra temperature Luminous flux in lm (at 25°C) Fluorescent lamps T 16 14 W T 16 21 W T 16 24 W T 16 28 W T 16 35 W T 16 39 W T 16 49 W T 16 54 W T 16 80 W T16-I 24 W T16-I 39 W T16-I 49 W T16-I 54 W T16-I 80 W T16-I 95 W T16-I 120 W T 16-R 22 W T 16-R 40 W T 16-R 55 W T 16-R 60 W T 26 18 W T 26 36 W T 26 58 W 25 42 66 13.350 3. nw ww. nw ww. nw ww.750 2.000 93 Characteristic values of the major lamps ww.000 76 16–20.000 88 24. nw ww.000 1. nw ww.000 93 20–24. nw ww.000 72 24. 70 24.000 71 12.300 3.750 4.300 9.600 3.l o s s b. nw ww.950 3.900 1.000 81 20–24.000 69 12.150 1. el ect r on i c b al l as t 24 / Chapter 4 System Lamp power service life* in W in h System power in W Max.200 4.000 approx.000 5.000 approx. nw ww.000 13.000 approx.000 76 20–24.000 84 20–24. 130 26 45–47 60 66 19–20 36 54–57 20–24.800 7.000 13. nw ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 G5 GX5 GX5 2GX13 2GX13 2GX13 2GX13 G13 G13 G13 1. 88 27 46 54 61 approx. 000 50 64 66 64 64 66 64 68 69 69 62 70 65 70 63 72 85 77 87 71 78 87 71 Chapter 4 / 25 * Lamp service life = mean service life up to 50 % failure (exception: Philips QL up to 10 % failure) . nw 25 30 42 8.000 10. nw TC-T(I)/-TEL(I) 13 W ww.000 10.200 4.000 10.000 10.200 1.000 10.l o s s b.000 10.200 1. nw TC-TEL(I) 32 W ww.000 20.500 4.000 8.000 10.000 5.000 8.000 8.000 10.000 10. nw TC-L 36 W ww. el ect r on i c b al l as t Lamp name System Lamp power service life* in W in h 15 17 23 31 17 23 31 8. nw TC-LI 80 W ww.000 8. nw TC-L 55 W ww. nw TC-TEL(I) 57 W ww.900 3. nw TC-T(I)/-TEL(I) 18 W ww. nw TC-L 80 W ww.The Lighting Handbook ma g n e t i c l ow.000 10. nw TC-L 24 W ww.000 20.000 10.000 10.000 8.200 6.000 10. system luservice life* minous efficiency in h in lm/W Luminous flux in lm (at 25°C) Compact fluorescent lamps TC-D/-DEL 10 W ww.000 8.800 900 1. nw TC-D/-DEL 18 W ww.000 10.000 8.000 10. nw TC-D/-DEL 13 W ww. nw TC-L 40 W ww. nw TC-LI 55 W ww.000 10. nw TC-D/-DEL 26 W ww. nw TC-TELI 70 W ww. nw TC-TELI/-QELI 120 W ww.000 8.500 4. nw TC-TELI 60 W ww.000 10.000 1.000 10. nw TC-T(I)/-TEL(I) 26 W ww.000 12 14 18–20 28 14 18–20 28 35–36 46–47 62 65 75 92 128 19 25–27 34–39 45 55–61 85 45 55–61 85 10.000 20.000 Characteristic values of the major lamps ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 G24d-1/q-1 G24d-1/q-1 G24d-2/q-2 G24d-3/q-3 GX24d-1/q-1 GX24d-2/q-2 GX24d-3/q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-4 GX24q-5 2G8 GX24q-6 2G8 2G8 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 600 900 1.800 6.800 2. nw TC-L 18 W ww.000 Colour Colour rendition Base temperature index Ra System power in W Lamp Max.200 1.000 9.800 2.000 3. nw TC-TEL(I) 42 W ww.300 4.400 3. nw TC-LI 40 W ww. nw TC-TELI 85 W ww.000 10.800 6. 000 3.000 **1.400 4.2 ww QT-DE 12 300 W ww QT-DE 12 500 W ww QT 32 100 W matt ww QT 32 150 W matt ww QT 32 250 W matt ww ≥90 ≥90 ≥90 ≥90 ≥90 ≥90 GY6.35 GY6.35 GU5.000 60.3 G53 G53 600 930 **700–14.000 Induction lamps LMG-IHf 55 W (QL 55 W) ww.100–6.000 Characteristic values of the major lamps ≥90 ≥90 ≥90 ≥90 ≥90 ≥90 R7s R7s R7s E27 E27 E27 2.000 3.000 4. el ect r on i c b al l as t 26 / Chapter 4 System Lamp power service life* in W in h 55 85 165 4.550–3.000 4.430 2.000 9.000 60. nw LMG-IHf 85 W (QL 85 W) ww.000 2. nw LMG-IHf 165 W (QL 165 W) ww.000 2.ma g n e t i c l ow-l o s s b.000 **850–15.000 1.300 12. nw Low-voltage halogen lamps QT 12 35 W ww QT 12 50 W ww QR-CBC 51 35 W (8–60°) ww QR-CBC 51 50 W (8–60°) ww QR 111 75 W (8–45°) ww QR 111 100 W (8–45°) ww High-voltage halogen lamps QT-DE 12 150 W L 114.200 5.000 2.500 1.700–30.000 * Lamp service life = mean service life up to 50 % failure (exception: Philips QL up to 10 % failure) ** Axial luminous intensity in cd.000 64 71 73 16 18 16 18 10 10 14 16 19 14 16 16 Lamp name System power in W Colour rendition Base Colour index Ra temperature Luminous flux in lm (at 25°C) Max.000 4. The Lighting Handbook .000 **2.000 2.000 60.800–48.500 2. system luLamp service life* minous efficiency in lm/W in h ≥80 ≥80 ≥80 Special Special Special 3.650 6.3 GU5. 065 6.000 ≥90.500 275–285 6.200–5.000 275–285 6.000–6. ≥80 E40/G22/G12 23. tw nw.000–25.000–21.300 82–96 9. system luservice life* minous efficiency in h in lm/W Luminous flux in lm (at 25°C) 72 ca.000 ≥90.000 ≥80 G12 5. ≥70.000 ≥80 PGJ5/G8.800 272 6–12.100 112–115 6.5 6.000 ≥80 E27 8.500–12. tw nw ww.500–9. nw ww. ≥70.500 44–46 9.000 ≥90. ≥70.000 ≥90.000 82–96 6. nw ww ww.000 63 72 74 93 93 90 83 71 84 91 69 77 76 71 83 91 83 83 83 96 Chapter 4 / 27 * Lamp service life = mean service life up to 50 % failure (exception: Philips QL up to 10 % failure) .000 ≥90. ≥60 E40 20.000 9–12. nw ww.000 168–177 6. ≥80 E27 5.000 6. ≥70 E27 4.500 120 12.500 170 9–12. ≥80 G8.5/GU6.000 6.615–1. nw ww. nw ≥80.300 82–96 9. ≥60 E40 19. nw ww.5 3.000 6–12.000 6–12.000 9–12.000 ≥80 G12 13.000 ≥80 G12 14.500 44–46 9.000 ≥90.500 168–177 6.000 Colour Colour rendition Base temperature index Ra System power in W Lamp Max.000 9–12.000–8.000 ≥90.000 6.000 7. ≥80 G12 3. ≥80 PGJ5/G8.300–7.000 ≥90.000 ≥80 E40 24.900–5.000 1.000 9–12.000 400–460 6.100–3. nw.000–3.300–8.400–7.000 Metal halide lamps HIE 70 W HIE 100 W HIE 150 W HIE 250 W HIE 400 W HIE 1.The Lighting Handbook ma g n e t i c l ow-l o s s b. nw ww.000 168–177 6.500 82–96 6. tw ww ww.000 85 9–12.000 9–12. ≥70 E27 10. nw ww. ≥80 E27 12.000 ≥90. nw ww ww. nw ww.000 W HIE-CE 70 W (Ceramic) HIE-CE 100 W (Ceramic) HIE-CE 150 W (Ceramic) HIE-CE 250 W (Ceramic) HIT 70 W HIT 150 W HIT 250 W HIT-TC-CE 20 W (Ceramic) HIT-TC-CE 35 W (Ceramic) HIT-TC-CE 70 W (Ceramic) HIT-CE 35 W (Ceramic)) HIT-CE 70 W (Ceramic) HIT-CE 150 W (Ceramic) HIT-CE 250 W (Ceramic) Characteristic values of the major lamps ww.050–1. ≥70 E27 7. nw ww. 24 42–45 80–83 42–45 80–83 172 9–12. el ect r on i c b al l as t Lamp name System Lamp power service life* in W in h 80–83 172 6.000 ≥80.000–25. ≥80 G12 6.500 270 12.000–13. nw nw. 160 80–83 172 ca.5 1.500–43. ≥60 E40 17.700 ≥90.000 ≥60 E40 95. nw ww.000 ≥80. 000 10.000 10.000 13.500–14.200–3.000 11. ≥80.300–2.000 12–15. ≥80 ≥90.700–7.l o s s b.000 6.000 10.000 10. tw HIT-DE 250 W ww.000 ≥60.000–56. el ect r on i c b al l as t 28 / Chapter 4 System Lamp power service life* in W in h 80–83 172 42–45 80–83 172 10. ≥20 E40 37.000–33. All data without engagement.200 24.400 5. nw.000 3.500 ≥40 ≥40 E40 E40 13.900–5. ≥20 E40 22.000 12.000 6. The Lighting Handbook . nw High-pressure sodium vapour lamps HSE 250 W ww HSE 400 W ww HST-CRI 35 W (SDW-T) ww HST-CRI 50 W (SDW-T/-TG) ww HST-CRI 100 W (SDW-T/-TG) ww HST 250 W ww HST 400 W ww 275–285 440–450 41–42 62 114–116 275 440–450 10.000 ≥60.ma g n e t i c l ow.250 20.000 Metal halide lamps HIT-DE 70 W ww.000 75 75 72 85 79 80 89 48 51 Lamp name System power in W Colour rendition Base Colour index Ra temperature Luminous flux in lm (at 25°C) Max. ≥80 ≥90.000 62 112 10. ≥20 E40 36.000 7.500 * Lamp service life = mean service life up to 50 % failure (exception: Philips QL up to 10 % failure) For an extensive table of lamp data.300 ≥80 PG12-1/GX12-1 2. please refer to the Technical Appendix of the ZUMTOBEL product catalogue.000 12. system luLamp service life* minous efficiency in lm/W in h ≥90.000 10.000–32.000 112 120 31 39 42 116 123 Characteristic values of the major lamps ≥60.400 ≥80 PG12-1/GX12-1 4.000 ≥80 PG12-1 1. nw.000 ≥60. tw HIT-DE-CE 35 W (Ceramic) ww HIT-DE-CE 70 W (Ceramic) ww.000 6.000 10. ≥80 ≥80 RX7s RX7s Fc2 RX7s RX7s RX7s Fc2 5. ≥20 E40 23. nw HIT-DE-CE 250 W (Ceramic) ww High-pressure mercury vapour lamps HME 250 W ww. ≥70 ≥80 ≥90.000 82–96 168–177 275–285 40–46 89–95 168–177 275 266–270 425 8. ≥80. nw HIT-DE 150 W ww.000 22.000 6.000 7–15. nw HIT-DE-CE 150 W (Ceramic) ww. In case of doubt.000 10.000–6.000 6. nw HME 400 W ww.000 8.000 10.000–54. please contact the lamp manufacturer. ≥70 ≥90. it has been prohibited to sell class D ballasts. very high loss (conventional ballast) Since 21 May 2002. moderate loss (conventional ballast) Magnetic ballasts. The EEI (Energy Efficiency Index) classifies ballasts into seven categories: Class A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 C D Ballasts Dimmable electronic ballasts Reduced-loss electronic ballasts Electronic ballasts Magnetic ballasts. very low loss (low-loss ballast) Magnetic ballasts. In order to clarify the power consumption of the ballast/lamp system. class C ballasts have ceased to be produced since 21 November 2005 at the latest.Energy efficiency of luminaires Most of the electrical power is consumed in the lamp and its control gear. low loss (low-loss ballast) Magnetic ballasts. the European Union has adopted the energy classification system (Directive 2000/55/EU on energy efficiency requirements for ballasts for fluorescent lamps). Example for T26 36 W 840: EEI A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 C D ≤ 19 W (25 % dimming is equivalent to 50 % A3) ≤ 36 ≤ 38 ≤ 41 ≤ 43 ≤ 45 ≤ 45 Chapter 4 / 29 The Lighting Handbook . ZUMTOBEL names • • • DOD DALI DALI only DSI 1–10 V Heavy-duty e.b. Electr. ballast Overview of electronic ballasts 30 / Chapter 4 • • Luminaires can be dimmed collectively No readdressing required when replacing control gear Luminaires can be dimmed collectively Can be used with some reservations in emergency lighting installations Long service life up to 1,000,000 h Ambient temperatures up to 70°C Integral over-/ undervoltage identification • • • • Long lamp service life High-quality light thanks to high-frequency operation More application options owing to DC operation Faulty lamps automatically switched off and switched on again after lamp replacement • • • • Switchable at zero power Dimmability subsequently enabled Dimmability DALI-addressable Configurable Error and status feedback Dimming automatically blocked in DC mode Emergency lighting level adjustable for DC mode Emergency lighting-compatible DC mode Critical operating conditions • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Special features DALI-switchable Dimming function can be enabled subsequently via Litenet Addressability: Addressability: individual individual dimming dimming Flexible grouping Flexible grouping without rewiring without rewiring Luminaire status Luminaire status feedback feedback DSI control also possible For detailed information on ambient conditions and conditions of use, please refer to the product data sheets. The Lighting Handbook Power consumption –20 % to –88 % Energy saving at normal operation Set-AC compared with conventional ballasts 20 % to 88 % at 1 % dimming level (off) function of dimmer setting 55–8 W P C A 69 W 8W Power consumption as a 55 W 45 W 35 W 25 W 8W 8W 1% 100 % 75 % 50 % 25 % Conventional ballast Controlled by LUXMATE Dimmer setting 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 Power requirement of a traditional freestanding luminaire Potential energy savings using daylight sensors and presence detectors up to 70 % compared with constant light e.g. freestanding luminaire using SensControl Power requirement of a freestanding luminaire using SensControl ▼ ▼ ▼ ▼ ▼ absent ▼ ▼ ▼ absent cloud cover ▼ ▼ ▼ increasing daylight sufficient daylight decreasing daylight Light required in terms of ergonomics using SensControl Set-DC 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 further potential saving of 27 % 10 0 59 53 48 43 39 35 30 28 AC-mode DC-mode potential energy saving of 52 % in (%) Emergency lighting extra function in Tridonic PCA Thanks to a reducible DC dimming level (Set-DC), the emergency lighting installation can be designed for reduced operation. At a luminous flux of 10 %, savings of up to 70 % are possible at DC operation. The Lighting Handbook ▼ 22 17 12 Power (W) 10 at 230 V DC Chapter 4 / 31 Overview of LED control gear Cable length vs. active power for 24 V DC supply Cable lengths are limited exclusively on the assumption that a maximum voltage drop of 0.7 V is permissible. Cable cross-section/length: Output 10 W 15 W 20 W 30 W 40 W 50 W 60 W 70 W 80 W 90 W 100 W 110 W Current 0.417 A 0.625 A 0.833 A 1.250 A 1.667 A 2.083 A 2.500 A 2.917 A 3.333 A 3.750 A 4.167 A 4.583 A Voltage 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 0.75 mm2 1 mm2 35.0 m 23.5 m 17.5 m 11.5 m 8.5 m 7.0 m 5.5 m 5.0 m 4.0 m 3.5 m 3.5 m 3.0 m 47.0 m 31.0 m 23.5 m 15.5 m 11.5 m 9.0 m 7.5 m 6.5 m 5.5 m 5.0 m 4.5 m 4.0 m 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 70.5 m 47.0 m 35.0 m 23.5 m 17.5 m 14.0 m 11.5 m 10.0 m 8.5 m 7.5 m 7.0 m 6.0 m 117.5 m 78.5 m 60.0 m 39.0 m 29.5 m 23.5 m 19.5 m 16.5 m 14.5 m 13.0 m 11.5 m 10.5 m Please note: maximum voltage drop permissible = 0.7 V RGB and dimming of LED luminaires For “dimming applications”, owing to partly high outputs and accordingly possible interferences with electromagnetic compatibility, other points must be taken into account: A: control unit to LED C004 amplifier The cable between control unit and amplifier (LED C004) may be up to 20 m long. Make sure that the minimum input voltage of the amplifier’s control input is at least 12 V. B: LED C004 amplifier to first LED luminaire C: control unit to LED luminaire/luminaire group In order to avoid interferences with electromagnetic compatibility, the use of shielded cables for the lead between control unit and LED luminaires is recommended for cables longer than 0.5 m. Even if cables are shielded, cables longer than 15 m may lead to electromagnetic compatibility interferences in highly sensitive areas. 32 / Chapter 4 The Lighting Handbook D: mains unit to LED luminaire/luminaire group The maximum cable length between mains unit and last LED luminaire is specified in the table. Control gear should possibly be placed next to the luminaires. A C + Ch 1-3 Control unit e.g. C002, K211 – Ch 1 – Ch 2 – Ch 3 + – Mains unit 12/24 V e.g. K240 + Uin + Ch 1-3 – Uin Amplifier + Ch 1-3 e.g. LED C004 – Ch 1 – Ch 1 – Ch 2 – Ch 2 – Ch 3 – Ch 3 D B LED luminaire Cable length for supplying current-controlled LEDs, switchable Cable lengths are limited exclusively on the assumption that a maximum voltage drop of 0.7 V is permissible. In each case, they relate to the last luminaire in a group. It is assumed that the control gear operates at max. capacity – for details, please refer to the control gear’s technical description. A minimum voltage of 4.5 V is assumed for each LED. Please note: use copper cables. Cables must not be laid in parallel to mains/highvoltage conductors. Cable length for supplying current-controlled LEDs, dimmable PWM The max. cable length to a group’s last luminaire may be 13 m. The cable cross-section has to be > 0.25 mm2. For cables longer than 1.5 m, shielded cables have to be used. The Lighting Handbook Current for LED lum. 350 mA 700 mA Cable cross-section/length 0.75 mm2 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 30.0 m 40.0 m 60.0 m 100.0 m 15.0 m 20.0 m 30.0 m 50.0 m Chapter 4 / 33 Mains 24 V-DC LED-mains unit On/Off Dimming Monochrome LED luminaires, voltage controlled 24 V LEDOS 24 V MICROS LED 24 V SYSTEMLED Deco KAVA LED 24 V SYSTEMLED Flood 34 / Chapter 4 LEDOS 24 V SYSTEMLED Deco KAVA LED 24 V LEDOS 24 V SYSTEMLED Deco KAVA LED 24 V Mains 24 V-DC PWM * These luminaires must be additionally supplied with 24 V DC supply voltage! DALI/DSI/switchDIM Mains K210 24 V-DC LED-mains unit Mains 24 V-DC SYSTEMLED Flood* 24 V-DC PWM LED-mains unit Max. 3 POTI 100 K/Ohm linear or max. 3 x control voltage 0–10 V C001 SYSTEMLED Flood* The Lighting Handbook The Lighting Handbook Mains 24 V-DC PWM 24 V RGB LED luminaires in dynamic colours SYSTEMLED Deco RGB KAVA LED RGB PHAOS lighting tile DALI Mains K211 24 V-DC LED-mains unit Mains 24 V-DC SYSTEMLED Flood RGB* LEDOS 24 V RGB 24 V-DC PWM * These luminaires must be additionally supplied with 24 V DC supply voltage! LED-mains unit 3 POTI 100 K/Ohm linear or 3 x control voltage 0–10 V SYSTEMLED Deco RGB KAVA LED RGB C001 Mains 24 V-DC SYSTEMLED Flood RGB* LEDOS 24 V RGB PHAOS lighting tile LED-mains unit 24 V-DC PWM DALI C003 SYSTEMLED Deco RGB KAVA LED RGB PHAOS lighting tile Mains 24 V-DC SYSTEMLED Flood RGB* LEDOS 24 V RGB LED-mains unit 1 POTI 100 K/Ohm linear 24 V-DC PWM C002 Mains 24 V-DC SYSTEMLED Flood RGB* LEDOS 24 V RGB SYSTEMLED Deco RGB KAVA LED RGB PHAOS lighting tile Application C004 PWM amplifier for controlling LED objects with higher output LEDOS 24 V mono/RGB LED-mains unit PWM control signal (e.g. C001, C002, C003, K210, K211) C004 Chapter 4 / 35 The C004 amplifier is used where the luminaire output is higher than the output power of the control unit used. SYSTEMLED Deco mono/RGB KAVA LED mono/RGB PHAOS lighting tile Autom. colour sequence Colour sequence can be selected with DALI, 0–10 V with sequencer 24 V-DC PWM C003. K210) LED mains unit (constant current) dimmable via PWM LEDOS B 350 mA Mains 24 V-DC 350 mA RGB LED luminaires in dynamic colours. currentcontrolled 36 / Chapter 4 ORILED 350 mA PANOS S 100 LED 350 mA PASO II RGB 350 mA PASO II RGB 350 mA Mains 350 mA PWM LEDOS B 350 mA PWM control signal (e. K211) 350 mA PWM Mains 350 mA PWM LEDOS B RGB 350 mA Dali K350 DALI RGB Constant-current converter LEDOS B RGB 350 mA The Lighting Handbook .g.g. C002.Mains 350 mA LED mains unit (constant current) ORILED 350 mA PANOS S 100 LED 350 mA On/Off Automatic colour sequence with sequencer. C001. DALI 0–10 V Dimming Monochrome 350 mA LED luminaires. current-controlled LED mains unit PWM control signal C350 PWM dimmer (e. C001. . . . . . . . . . . Building-wide with LITENET and PROFESSIONAL . . . Creative solutions with EMOTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 4 – 11 12 – 13 14 – 15 16 – 19 . . . . Easy dimming with BASIC and DIMLITE . . . . . . . . . Plug & play with ZBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 5 Lighting and room management LUXMATE lighting management . . . . . . . LUXMATE lighting management – The intelligent control system for individual rooms and throughout buildings Function Applications LUXMATE LITENET (based on TCP/IP and DALI) – Artificial light/daylight/blinds – Office building with high – Maximum flexibility owing to requirements in terms reconfiguration by software of flexibility. group dimming – Commercial premises – Zero-power switching and dimming BASIC ZBOX EMOTION LITENET PROFESSIONAL – Hotels – Private dwellings – Shops Chapter 5 / 3 . Tempura – Wellness – ACTIVE LIGHT lighting concepts – Control rooms – Flexibility of individual – Offices addressing/grouping – In the home ZBOX – Lighting scenes – RGB colour control – Nightlogic – Webtool The Lighting Handbook LUXMATE BASIC/DIMLITE (based on DSI/DALI) – Daylight-based – In the home – Infrared remote control unit – Small offices & – Standard switch components surgeries – No addressing. ergonomic com– Can be subsequently upgraded patibility and econ. efficiency with extra functions (on demand) – OPC and BACnet interfaces with other building services and BMS – Optimised for TASK AREA concepts according to EN 12464 – Integration of ONLITE emergency lighting system – Customised control concepts LUXMATE PROFESSIONAL (based on LUXMATE bus system) – Artificial light/daylight/blinds – Conference rooms – Interfaces to media technology – Office buildings – Integration of ONLITE – Shopping malls emergency lighting system – Museums – link to BMS and central – Industry maintenance LUXMATE EMOTION (based on DALI) – Presence-based/daylight-based control – Shops – Timer – Health & Care – Special luminaires: RGB. 2 channels 2 or 4-channel multifunction Control Module name: momentary-action switch. presence detector. 1 channel Dimming..) Two steps to create your lighting solution Dimming with LUXMATE BASIC/DIMLITE 4 / Chapter 5 DALI DSI DALI-T DSI-T* DALI-TD DSI-TD* DALI-TLC DSI-TLC DIMLITE 4ch** (4-channel) DIMLITE 2CH** (2-channel) All modules available for installation in luminaire or recess into ceiling * also available as housing for installation in switch cabinet ** only available as housing for installation in switch cabinet 1. IR remote control unit The Lighting Handbook . select control funtion required Function Dimming.. presence detector momentary-action switch momentary-action switch. .LUXMATE control unit Lamp control gear (electronic ballast./3 ch. PCI-FOX electronic ballast 2. select appropriate lamp control gear Lamps GLS lamps PAR lamps HV halogen incandescent lamps LV halogen incandescent lamps Fluorescent lamps LED High-pressure discharge lamps Dimming range 0–100 % 0–100 % 0–100 % 0–100 % 1–100 % 0–100 % cannot be dimmed All control gear with DALI/DSI control input Phase dimmer: 500–1000–5000 VA Phase dimmer: 500–1000–5000 VA Phase dimmer: 500–1000–5000 VA electronic dimmable transformer: 105 VA + 150 VA electronic dimmable ballast electronic dimmable LED converter 1 ch. with 1 light-level memory Daylight-based dimming. light sensor momentary-action switch Circle. transformer. 1 channel. light sensor. 25* max.5 mm2. 25 DALI transformer. 25* D1 D2 APD Momentary-action switch control L module with input for preset light level N D1 T T D2 DSI-TD Preset/Dia or L' N N L DALI-TD L L’ N PE T Alternative: Connect terminals “T ” and “T ” together with a jumper if a single momentary-action switch is used. max.The Lighting Handbook Lamp control gear Lamps User control units Control Units L N PE DSI electronic ballast. 300 VA LUXMATE BASIC DSI-TD or DALI-TD D phase dimmed phase neutral protective earth momentary-action switch input control line earth AC voltage * available on request LV halogen incandescent lamps max. max. 25 DALI electronic ballast. 105/150 VA Arguments for your customers Dimming using conventional momentary-action light switches and with dimming-level memory Chapter 5 / 5 – – – – – – Absolutely flicker-free dimming – Simple to operate using conventional momentary-action light switches – throughout – Hence ensures standardised design of light switches and sockets – Any number of momentary-action light switches can be connected in parallel – Dimming range: 1 to 100 % light Lamps can be started at any dimming level Suitable for all major lamp types Easy to install Insensitive to mains fluctuations and interference Components can be delivered separately or pre-fitted in the luminaire Dimming-level memory . 25* Fluorescent lamps T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL L N D1 PCA D2 12 11 10 9 230/240 V 50/60 Hz Conventional double momentary-action light switch On/Off Dimming Control line e. max. max. 25 DALI phase dimmer. 2 m D1 D2 TE Incandescent lamps/ HV halogen incandescent lamps max.g. NYM 2 x 1. max. Programming instructions for preset light level (Dia): • Set brightness level required using momentary-action switch • Press the Preset/Dia switch for at least 5 seconds or DSI transformer. max. max. length 100 m Conventional momentaryaction light switch Preset/Dia DSI phase dimmer. based exactly on the daylight available – Accurate window-light sensor rather than error-prone roomlight sensor – Energy savings of up to 75 % – Brightness level can be changed at any time using momentary-action dimmer switches – Economically priced – short pay-back period – Long lamp service life – Option to connect presence detector The Lighting Handbook 6 / Chapter 5 .Daylight-based control with DIMLITE and DALI/DSI-TLC Applications – Single and team offices – Areas near windows in shopping centres – Classrooms – Industrial bays – Gym halls – Warehouses 0% 50 % 500 lx artificial light daylight Arguments for your customers – Dims the lighting from 100–1 %. ED-EYE/LSD sensor positioning ° ° ° Installed in luminaire 2 groups 4 groups DALI-TLC/DSI-TLC – Switch cabinet DIMLITE 2ch DIMLITE 4ch The Lighting Handbook Chapter 5 / 7 . Maximum of 8 ED units at Control IN (exception: max. − Maximum cable length for all control lines (Control-IN. OFF) or group module (dimming of Group 1. depending on the control unit used.5 mm². − The DIMLITE outputs are DSI or DALI broadcast – no addressing is required during commissioning. no addressing required Design notes − DIMLITE 2ch two-channel unit and DIMLITE 4ch four-channel unit are identical except for the number of output channels and corresponding key inputs. 1 light sensor).DIMLITE Multifunctional lighting control Arguments for your customers – Compact lighting control unit for 2/4 luminaire groups – DALI and DSI outputs – automatic identification – Reducing stand-by loss: automatic power disconnection of lighting actuators via integrated relay – Up to 3 lighting scenes. to be individually combined: − daylight-based control − lighting scene module − presence detectors/movement sensors − group module − infrared remote control unit − Circle comfort control unit − AUTO setup: automatic initialisation. − The functions of the “ED-SDED2” ED unit may be selected using the integrated rotary switch: either scene module (1. − Maximum of 25 DALI units (25 DALI loads) or 50 DSI units per output channel. 300 m each at 1. 4). DSI and DALI): max. 8 / Chapter 5 The Lighting Handbook . 3. − Up to 3 lighting scenes. an external power contactor is recommended. 2. − PIR input to connect a conventional movement sensor. 2. 3 or OFF. in case of higher loads or capacitive/inductive loads. each control unit will always call up the same scene 1. 3. − Only Zumtobel ED units may be connected to Control-IN. one of them with daylight-based control (depending on additional devices) – Modular range of functions. Groups are assigned by wiring the lighting actuators accordingly. − Relay for mains cut-off: 16 A resistive load. 2. − Conventional 230 V momentary-action switches can be connected to the momentary-action switch inputs. 300 m at 1.5 mm² max. unit T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL fluorescent lamps T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL fluorescent lamps Load contactor (optional) Multifunctional lighting control max.The Lighting Handbook DIMLITE L 230 V AC N PE ED-Eye ED-Sens IRlight sensor (PD+IR) TOUCH Multi-sensor DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load) PCA User control units Control units Lamp control gear Lamps ED-IR infrared receiver L N DA DA DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load) PCA ED-SDED2 ED-SDED2 Circle Cxx group lighting control point module scene module comf.5 mm² max.: incandescent lamps Chapter 5 / 9 Lighting scene/ autom. 300 m at 1. contr. daylight-based control All groups Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 .g. 8 ED units L N DA DA DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load) PCA optional mains isolation facility Relay L N DA DA DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load) PCA max.: incandescent lamps DA K DA K’ TE one4all (1 DALI load) e.g. 25 DALI or 50 DSI per channel T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL fluorescent lamps T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL fluorescent lamps Control IN Channels 3 + 4 only with DIMLITE 4 ch L N DA DA Presence detector L N DA DA EMOTION-1RUK (10 DALI loads) e. 5 mm 2 max. length 100 m L N D1 D2 The Lighting Handbook . II DALI electronic ballast. 25/group I. max. 25/group I.g. II 12 L 11 N D1 10 PCA D2 9 Group I Conventional double momentary-action light switch G I G II L T1 T3 PD Daylight-based control unit installed in luminaire/recessed into ceiling N Se2Se1 T2 D2 D1 T4 D2 D1 DSI-TLC in DALI-TLC On/Off Dimming Motion sensor/ Presence detector or DSI electronic ballast. NYM 2 x 1.User control units Control units Lamp control gear Lamps Daylight-based control for small rooms LUXMATE BASIC Daylight DSI-TLC or DALI-TLC 10 / Chapter 5 Fluorescent lamps T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL 12 11 10 9 Group II PCA L 230/240 V 50/60 Hz N PE LSD light sensor Light-sensor line e. max. 25 /group I. max. 25/group I.g. max.5 mm2. NYM 2 x 1. II TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL DALI electronic ballast. II L N PE T PD Se D phase neutral protective earth momentary-action switch input presence detector input light sensor input control line earth AC voltage Control line e. max. length 100 m Fluorescent lamps T26/T16 DSI electronic ballast. 50/60 Hz N PE L N DALI bus power supply DA DA LUXMATE BASIC Circle Kit DA DA DA DA DALI-CSS DALI-CSW DALI-based lighting control system for individual rooms L N PE DA phase neutral protective earth DALI control line earth AC voltage optionally several control points supply via DALI control line (3 DALI loads) L DALI electronic ballast N PE PCA DA DA L DALI phase dimmer N PE DA APD DA L DALI transformer N PE DA TE DA * max. length of DALI line Ø 2 x 0.50 mm² max. 300 m 2 x 0. 64 DALI-compatible lamp control gear Arguments for your customers Chapter 5 / 11 – – – – Three lighting scenes can be called up using intuitive control unit Two luminaire groups can be individually dimmed Control of a max.00 mm² 2 x 1. 232 m max. 116 m max. 174 m max.75 mm² 2 x 1.50 mm² > User control units Lamps L Mains 230/240 VAC.The Lighting Handbook Lamp control gear max. of 64 DALI-controllable luminaires Luminaires addressed via control unit – Several control units can be used in parallel – Easy installation – Personal lighting scenes can be stored . the electrician must ensure proper selectivity of the installation. It makes sense to let an engineer do the commissioning. How can the ZBOX be upgraded? All LUXMATE bus units can be connected to the ZBOX Controller. total maximum output power per ZBOX: 16 A. It is also possible to network several Controllers. Depending on the outputs of the luminaires used. Can the ZBOX also be used for other applications? For other applications such as nursing homes. extremely high inductive or capacitive loads may destroy the dimmer. private dwellings or ordinary shops. of 300 W/channel or 10 DALI loads. In this case. the plug&play function may not work.ZBOX plug&play system for hotel rooms. WEBTOOL. The relay contact and the Controller have no overload protection. conventional momentaryaction switches can be integrated. except for RGB/W) Does one always have to use a CIRCLE control unit? Via the SDED2 input module. The Lighting Handbook 12 / Chapter 5 . no licence required FAQs What is the minimum load to be applied to the universal dimmer? 20 W How many luminaires may be connected to a ZBOX Controller? Max. private dwellings and shops Plug&Play – pre-addressed and preprogrammed – plug-in connectors – local stand-alone or networked system – web tool for fine-adjustment. – direct connection via TCP-IP – transparency of costs – can be upgraded – 4 control points included – DALI Broadcast (no addressing of loads. the function and control concept can be adjusted via the ZBOX. a varying number of electronic ballasts may be used for an automatic circuit-breaker! What happens at the output side during a short circuit? The dimming module has been fitted with overload protection for lighting loads. DALI and/or relay . 4 channels No phase dimmer Ceiling Group 3 Entrance area Ceiling Group 5 Wall/table Group 4 optionally Group 6 Chapter 5 / 13 * Every luminaire optionally connected to phase dimmer.The Lighting Handbook Left bed/reading Group 2 Group 1 Right bed/reading Window Bathroom Mirror Ceiling Wellness** Group 9 Blinds/ curtain ZBOX wiring scheme Group 8 Group 7 ** Luminaire pre-addressed. 000 W 4 x 920 W 4 x 800 W 4 x 10A 4 x 10A 4 x 800 W 14 / Chapter 5 . actuators. corrected) TC with low-loss ballast (parallel p. NYM 2 x 1. actuators. SDW-T.LUXMATE EMOTION Lighting control system Operation/supply L N PE Mains 230/240 V AC.action or action switch standard switch detector COM T 1 T 2 COM T 3 DA DA DA DA DALI 1 DALI 2 EKXP installation box (please order separately) COM T 4 DA DA EMOTION-BVS2* EMOTION-EYE (2 DALI loads) DA DA EMOTION-BV2* max. ballast LV with transformer HIT. 30A for 0.f.5 s max. QT T16/T26 with low-loss ballast (parallel p.5 mm 2 max. corrected) T16/T26/TC with electr.f.75 mm 2 1. NYM 2 x 1. 0. – EMOTION-4RUKS 4 x 2. 64 users (addresses) 99 DALI loads. HS.g.00 mm 2 1. inputs EMOTION-SENS (4 DALI loads) Cable lengths of DALI control line Conductor cross-sections DALI control line 2 2 2 2 x x x x 0. 50/60 Hz EMOTION Touch/EMOTION Touch C L N MomentaryDouble Presence momentary. 64 users (addresses) 99 DALI loads. HM Safe installed load EMOTION-1RUK 500 W 250 W 250 W 30A for 0.5 mm 2 max.50 0. PAR.g. inputs Line 2: DALI control line e. length 300 m max.25 m COM T 1 T 2 T 3 T 4 DA DA EMOTION-SDED2 (2 DALI loads) DA DA DA DA Line 1: DALI control line e.50 mm 2 mm 2 IR-TOUCH Cable length 116 174 232 300 m m m m Switching lamps using LUXMATE EMOTION Lamp type A.5 s max. length 300 m max. g. 2 m TE one4all (1 DALI load) R G B DALI-LED converter (1 DALI load) LV halogen incandescent lamps Incandescent lamps/ HV halogen incandescent lamps e.g. STARFLEX fibre optics (1 DALI load) DALI-2DSI (1 DALI load) D1 D2 D1 D2 25 DSI luminaires 25 DSI luminaires L N DA DA Locally supplied emergency luminaire LOCAL CHECK NT1 NT3 LDE DO (2 DALI loads) L N DA DA Escape-sign luminaire LOCAL CHECK (1 DALI load) Chapter 5 / 15 .Lighting/emergency lighting L N DA DA DALI electronic ballast one4all (1 DALI load) K1 K 1' K2 K 2' K3 K 3' K4 K 4' K K' EMOTION-1RUK (10 DALI loads) EMOTION-CSX (3 DALI loads) L N DA DA L' N EMOTION-APD (1 DALI load) max. incandescent lamps 12 11 10 9 Fluorescent lamps T26/T16 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL L N DA DA EMOTION-4RUKS (1 DALI load) DA DA DA DA L N DA DA L N DA DA LED luminaires L N DA DA EMOTION-ANAS (1 DALI load) L N DA DA L' N 0/1–10 V units e. 000 output addresses fail-safe thanks to RAID1 – optional LITENET incontrol (or more upon request) operating software – can be cascaded as required – LITENET flexis N1 installed in – optional BACnet and OPC switch cabinet interfaces .000 output addresses – no server required – LITENET flexis N3 in 19" rack – fail-safe thanks to RAID1 – optional LITENET incontrol operating software – optional BACnet and OPC interfaces PC with LITENET insite management software LITENET flexis N1 LITENET flexis N1 LITENET flexis N1 Ethernet ( TCP/IP) Netlink Netlink Daylight sensor 3 x 64 DALI Luminaires Blinds Control points Standard L ITENET server 16 / Chapter 5 The Lighting Handbook LITENET flexible – LITENET server extremely – up to 10.LUXMATE LITENET for any size of building LITENET flexis N2 with server functions PC with LITENET insite management software Ethernet (TCP/IP) Netlink Netlink Daylight sensor 3 x 64 DALI Luminaires Bus Blinds Control points LITENET economy – up to 500 output addresses – no server required LITENET flexis N3 with server functions – LITENET flexisN2 without rotating parts (wear-free) – optional LITENET incontrol operating software PC with LITENET insite management software Ethernet (TCP/IP) Netlink Netlink Daylight sensor 3 x 64 DALI Luminaires Bus Blinds Control points LITENET compact – up to 2. Chapter 5 / 17 . as a switched phase is not required for each luminaire. via the easy to use LITENET-insite software. Operation Purchase Implementation Project stages Project planning Planning Design Costs of modification Modification costs with conventional luminaires Modification costs with DOD luminaires The Lighting Handbook The models of this switchable luminaire originally supplied already boast all the above-mentioned benefits. printer. – Status feedback from each individual luminaire: Detailed knowledge about the installation’s state enable the operator to optimise operation and maintenance. Moreover. e-mail or text message. ZUMTOBEL is now offering a real innovation providing cost benefits at all stages of a project – from design through to actual operation of a building. – Zero-power switching: Both installation effort and space required in the switch cabinet are reduced. And if dimming should be required at a later point in time – for instance for convenient control of scenes or economically efficient daylight-based control. users could only choose between switchable luminaires with electronic ballast or more expensive luminaires based on DALI.DALI – a must for modern office buildings Benefits of DALI installation: – Individual addressing: As each luminaire can be addressed individually. ZUMTOBEL “Dimming on Demand” (DOD) makes DALI available at a special price Previously. the dimming function can be purchased at any time via a software upgrade. With a switchable DALI luminaire model. without any additional installation effort. current alarms can be displayed by screen. Luminaires are grouped and assigned to control units subsequently. the highest flexibility requirements can be met and installation faults can be avoided. N L. B2. B2 LM-ZSM L. B2 L. N 18 / Chapter 5 . N B1. N RS-232 link to AV system ASCI plain text protocol B1. N 230 VAC B1. B 2 . L. N B 1 . B2 LM-SDED LM-SWED LM-RFR LUXMATE Bus Mains DSI. B2 LM-2FSE L. B2 B1. N B1. N B1. B2 LM-SI03 L. B2 L. N L. L. B2 LM-iZSQ L. N Motor 2 Timer control B1. B 2 .or DALI control line Sensor cable For dimming and switching individual luminaire groups EnOcean Function switch without battery Room management/central control/automation Screen B1. B2 K1 LM-2LSE Blinds Motor 1 B1. N 24VDC 24VAC B 1 . L.LUXMATE PROFESSIONAL (selection) Commissioning/user control units LM-CG/ LM-PFC LM-EG Installation-specific Single-room LM-MPO operation solution LM-CPA/CPO LM-XPO Single-/ Multi-room solution IRED LM-IRB LM-CS(X) control point IRS B1. B2 Blinds Motor 2 LM-2JSM LM-RV Partition switch L. N Sequence automation Motor 1 Window Window LM-BVS35 B1. B2 up to 10 DSI electronic ballasts D1. K L. DA LED converter LED luminaires LV halogen incandescent lamps DA. D2 L. N Electronic/conventional ballast for discharge lamps HIT/HST/HME lamps Switching LM-DSI L. DA TE DA.Lighting management LM-2RUK L. DA APD Fluorescent lamps Incandescent lamps/ HV halogen incandescent lamps DALI dimming ONLITE interface. N B1. DA DA. N B1. D2 D1. emergency lighting LM-DALIS SB 64 Local check repeater SB 128 local check CTP locally supplied LOCAL CHECK emergency luminaire LOCAL CHECK escape-sign luminaire ONLITE interface for emergency lighting/local supply Chapter 5 / 19 . B2 up to 64 ballasts in 16 groups DA. B2 L. N B1. B2 K'. D2 D1. N B1. D2 Fluorescent lamps LSD option to connect a daylight sensor to the LM-STL or LM-2TL/DALI up to 10 DSI electronic ballasts up to 10 DALI electronic ballasts D1. DA PCA LM-DALI L. N Daylight-based dimming (DSI or DALI) DA. D2 L. N Fluorescent lamps DSI dimming up to 10 DSI electronic ballasts up to 10 DALI electronic ballasts LM-2TL LM 2TL DALI L. N D1. D2 D1. . COPA D HIT 70/150 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ./rec. . . . . . . . . . . RTX II C-ID T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECTON(-I) + RW T16. . . . . . . . . MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES – BWS T16 (surf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA A-B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA I 250 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIGHT FIELDS surface-mounted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS HF/HG PSP+ 175/200/250 (partly PSP+). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 6 Quickplan – calculating the n° of lum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIRAL FAC-ID T16 1-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAN Supreme S-C/R . . . . . TECTON-IP louvre T16 . . . . . . VAERO-S ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECTON D-ID and I . . . . . . . . . . . CLARIS II MD-ID T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCUBA T26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS Q Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2LIGHT E1-Mini/TC-TELI/HIT and E3 TC-L . . . . . . . . . CLARIS II P-D T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAN Classic C-O/R . . . . . . . . PANOS L and H 200/250 . . . . MELLOW LIGHT IV – Grid-mesh controller (surf. . . . . CHIARO FTR390/FTR680 T16-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . required Efficiency method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS LG/LG PSP+ M LG TC-TEL 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA A-ASY HIT/HST . CLARIS II MD-D T16 . . . . .-mounted/rec) . . . . . LIGHT FIELDS A-ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA D 250 W QT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-mounted/recessed) . . . . . . TECTON D-PL (Pool-Light). . . . . . . . . . COPA D RKF/RKID 32/42/57/85 W . . MIRAL FAC T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIGHT FIELDS recessed T16 M625 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RTX II C or D. PERLUCE D/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TECTON D-ML-B and ML-C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA I 400 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIRAL FAC-ID T16 2-lamp . . . . . PANOS LF/LG TC-DEL 175/200/250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . MELLOW LIGHT IV Microprismatic (surf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS S HIT-CE 150/200/250 . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA A-B HIT/HST 400 W. . . . . . . . . MIREL FEC2 T16 M625. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAN Advanced A-C/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA A-N HME . . . . . . .-mounted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MELLOW LIGHT IV – Louvre (surf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PANOS Q High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MELLOW LIGHT IV Microprismatic (recessed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIREL FEC2 T16 M600. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 . . . . . . . TECTON(-I) + RW T16. . . . . . Free-standing uplights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .) SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID T16 EVG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OREA GZ-ID T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPA A-B HIT/HST 250 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLARIS II P-ID T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLARIS II MC-ID T16. A-ASY HST . . . . .-moun. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65° or 75°) all around the luminaire – Correction factors for dark rooms and different ceiling heights (no.g. these values are usually calculated on a computer-aided basis.7 Please note: with maximum spacing between luminaires. For designing. of luminaires x factor) – Maintenance factor uses an assumed value (graphs calculated using MF = 0. * Luminaire efficiency generally relates to laboratory measurements at an ambient temperature of 25 °C. The following formulae can be used to give an approximate figure for the mean illuminance and the number of luminaires required. the illuminance level required is usually not achieved. luminaire spacing to achieve a uniformity greater than or equal to 0.Efficiency method The Quickplan graphs have been calculated using the efficiency method. by accessing luminaire databases. Em = n · z · ØL · MF · A B n= Em · A z · ØL · MF · B Em = mean illuminance z = number of lamps per luminaire ØL = luminous flux of the lamp* B = utilization factor (= LB · R ) LB = luminaire efficiency R = room utilization factor n = number of luminaires MF = maintenance factor A = floor area – Standard UGR values and maintained luminance levels for luminance limit angle (e. The Lighting Handbook Chapter 6 / 3 . Today.8) – Uniformity: max. it is therefore required to use the rated luminous flux levels of lamps at 25 °C in the calculation programmes and/or when applying the efficiency method. 3 2/26 W (200) 2/26 W PSP+ (200) 2/26 W TC-DEL (250) 2/26 W PSP+ (250) X=4H Y=8H / S=0. 2.78 2000 h 1 year 3 years 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 180 200 86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 Uniformity Axial spacing up to 2. 65° / *75° < 19 < 19 *200 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 1000 cd/m2 < 22 < 19 1000 cd/m2 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 22 < 19 1000 cd/m2 200 cd/m2 < 19 < 16 Maintenance factor (MF) Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. 2/26 PSP+ 250) 3.4 1.2 1.2 1.8 m (2/26 200).9 m (2/13.500 lx 300 lx PANOS HF/HG PSP+175/200/250 (partly PSP+) 2/13 W TC-DEL (175) 2/13 W PSP+ (175) 4 / Chapter 6 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m PANOS HF/HG 2/13 W PSP+ (175) PANOS HF/HG 2/26 W (200) PANOS HF/HG 2/26 W PSP+ (200) PANOS HF/HG 2/26 W PSP+ (250) PANOS HF/HG 2/13 W TC-DEL (175) PANOS HF/HG 2/26 W TC-DEL (250) UGR_axial UGR_transv.2 m (2/13 PSP+.6 over 50 m² 1. 2/26) The Lighting Handbook .1 1. up to 4 m (2/13 W. 75° < 22 < 22 < 200 cd/m 2 < 22 < 22 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 200 cd/m 2 < 22 < 22 2/13 W (175) 2/18 W (200) Maintenance factor (MF) Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m PANOS LF/LG 2/13 W TC-DEL (175) PANOS LF/LG 2/18 W TC-DEL (200) PANOS LF/LG 2/26 W TC-DEL (250) UGR_axial UGR_transv.4 m (2/32 W) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 Chapter 6 / 5 Floor area m2 . 2/26 W). up to 4.2 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.3 PANOS LF/LG TC-DEL 175/200/250 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.78 2000 h 1 year 3 years 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 2/26 W (250) 86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 Uniformity 200 Axial spacing up to 3.7 m (2/18 W).1 1.4 1.6 over 50 m² 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.2 1. 65° < 1000 cd/m 2 < 28 < 25 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 25 < 25 < 25 < 25 < 1000 cd/m 2 40 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.4 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 PANOS LG 2/32 W TC-TEL (250) PANOS LG 2/32 W PSP+ TC-TEL (250) PANOS M LG 2/32 W TC-TEL (250) UGR_axial UGR_transv.78 2000 h 1 year 2 years Uniformity 180 200 Axial spacing up to 4.2 1.7 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .2 1.1 1.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 LG 2/32 W LG 2/32 W PSP+ M LG 2/32 W PANOS LG/LG PSP+ M LG TC-TEL 250 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.3 60 6 / Chapter 6 18 12 6 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.6 over 50 m² 1. 1 1.77 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 160 180 200 Axial spacing up to 1. < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 28 < 28 20 15 Maintenance factor (MF) 10 5 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.2 1.6 over 50 m² 1. and 1/70 W 250 up to 4 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Chapter 6 / 7 Floor area m2 .5 PANOS S 1/70 W HIT-CE (200) FL G12 PANOS S 1/70 W HIT-DE (250) UGR_axial UGR_transv.3 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 18 15 1/70 W (150) FL 1/70 W (200) FL 1/70 W (250) PANOS S HIT-CE 150/200/250 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 25 12 9 6 3 PANOS S 1/70 W HIT-CE (150) FL G8.2 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.7 m.4 1. 78 2000 h 1 year 3 years Uniformity 180 200 Axial spacing up to 3.2 1.9 m for LG.9 m for HG 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook . and 2.4 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area 60 8 / Chapter 6 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.6 over 50 m² 1.2 1.3 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.500 lx 300 lx 60 50 40 30 20 10 PANOS L and H 200/250 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. 65° / *75° *< 200 cd/m 2 < 22 < 22 *< 200 cd/m 2 < 22 < 22 < 200 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 < 200 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 40 LG 2/18 W (200) LG 1/32 W PSP+ (200) 30 HG 2/26 W (250) HG 1/42 W PSP+ (250) Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 PANOS LG 2/18 W (200) PANOS LG PSP+1/32 W (200) PANOS HG 2/26 W (250) PANOS HG 1/42 W PSP+ (250) UGR_axial UGR_transv.1 1. 76 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Max.4 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 60 50 40 30 20 10 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 PANOS Q LF 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) PANOS Q LG 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) PANOS Q LM 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) PANOS Q LL 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) UGR_axial UGR_transv.1 1.2 1.2 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area over 50 m² 1.6 PANOS Q Low Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. < 28 < 25 < 28 < 25 < 25 < 25 < 28 < 25 LL 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) 40 LM 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) 30 LF + LG 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.8 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 9 Floor area m2 . axial spacing up to 5.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0. 2 1.6 over 50 m² 1.76 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Max.1 • Ceiling Floor area 60 10 / Chapter 6 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 18 12 6 PANOS Q High Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.4 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .3 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.1 1. < 19 < 16 < 19 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 22 < 19 40 HG 2/18 W TC-TELI (250) HG 2/26 W TC-TELI (250) 30 HG 2/32 W TC-TELI (250) Maintenance factor (MF) 20 HF 2/42 W TC-TELI (250) 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.4 1.2 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 PANOS Q HG 2/18 W TC-TELI (250) PANOS Q HG 2/26 W TC-TELI (250) PANOS Q HG 2/32 W TC-TELI (250) PANOS Q HF 2/42 W TC-TELI (250) UGR_axial UGR_transv. axial spacing up to 3. 6 over 50 m² 1. axial spacing up to 5. 55° 65° <13 <13 < 1500 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2 <13 <13 < 1500 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2 <13 <13 < 1500 cd/m2 < 1500 cd/m2 <13 <13 <13 <13 30 12 6 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 2/80 W 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 40 18 2/35 W 2/54 W 2/49 W VAERO-S ID 2/28 W SR ASI1000 VAERO-S ID 2/35 W SR ASI1000 VAERO-S ID 2/49 W SR ASI1000 VAERO-S ID 2/54 W SR ASI1000 VAERO-S ID 2/80 W SR ASI1000 UGR_axial UGR_transv.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 2/28 W VAERO-S ID Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.6 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 11 Floor area m2 .1 1.2 1.77 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Max.2 1.4 1.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. 500 lx 300 lx 18 2/49 W OREA GZ-ID T16 15 12 2/54 W 2/80 W 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.1 1.6 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .6 over 50 m² 1.75 4000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 5.4 1.2 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 12 / Chapter 6 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. <13 <13 <13 <13 <13 <13 20 15 Maintenance factor (MF) 10 5 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.2 1.3 9 6 3 Ceiling height: 3 m 25 OREA GZ-ID 2/54 W T16 OREA GZ-ID 2/49 W T16 OREA GZ-ID 2/80 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.25 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. 7 m (2/28 W. 2/35 W). axial spacing up to 3.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m UGR_axial UGR_transv.1 1. 4/14 W) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 13 Floor area m2 .3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.6 over 50 m² 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. 50 L-FIELDS A 2/28 W L-FIELDS A 2/35 W L-FIELDS A 4/14 W < 16 < 16 < 16 < 16 < 16 < 16 65° < 1000 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2 40 18 12 6 30 2/28 W 2/35 W Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.2 1.4 m (2/24 W.2 1.4 1.77 6000 h 1 year 2 years Uniformity Continuous row spacing up to 180 200 3.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 4/14 W LIGHT FIELDS surface-mounted Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. 4 m (4/14 W) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m2 The Lighting Handbook .4 1.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 2/24 W LIGHT FIELDS recessed T16 M625 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.2 1. 65° 50 L-FIELD 2/24 W T16 L-FIELD 2/28 W T16 L-FIELD 2/35 W T16 L-FIELD 4/14 W T16 < 16 < 16 < 16 < 16 < 16 < 16 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2 40 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.1 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 14 / Chapter 6 24 18 12 6 4/14 W 2/28 W 2/35 W Ceiling height: 3 m UGR_axial UGR_transv.7 m (2/28 W.6 over 50 m² 1.77 6000 h 1 year 2 years Uniformity Continuous row spacing up to 180 200 3. axial spacing up to 3.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0. 2/35 W).2 1. 25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 L-FIELDS A-ID 2/49 W L-FIELDS A-ID 2/54 W L-FIELDS A-ID 4/24 W UGR_axial UGR_transv. 2/54 W).7 m (2/49 W.25 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. 65° <13 <13 < 1000 cd/m2 <13 <13 < 1000 cd/m2 <13 <13 < 1000 cd/m2 40 30 12 6 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 2/49 W 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.4 1.2 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 18 4/24 W 2/54 W LIGHT FIELDS A-ID Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.1 1.6 over 50 m² 1.2 1. axial spacing up to 3.75 4000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity Continuous row spacing up to 180 200 3.1 m (4/24 W) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 15 Floor area m2 . axial spacing up to 5.25 • Ceiling Floor area 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0. < 22 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 22 EM 1/55 W TC-L 625 30 12 6 EM 1/55 W TC-L 600 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 EM 2/49 W T16 10 Clean medium-sized room (T16) Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance MF= 0.3 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 40 ML4 B EM 1/55 W TC–L M600 ML4 B EM 1/55 W TC-L M625 ML4 A EM 2/35 W T16 M625 ML4 A EM 2/49 W T16 M600 ML4 A EM 2/49 W T16 M625 UGR_axial UGR_transv.6 over 50 m² 1.1 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 16 / Chapter 6 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 18 EM 2/35 W T16 MELLOW LIGHT IV Microprismatic (recessed) Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.2 1.4 1.7 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Floor area m2 The Lighting Handbook .2 1.4 m (1/55 W) or 4.76 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 160 180 200 Max. 3 30 AM 2/40 W TC-L Maintenance factor (MF) 20 AM 2/49 W T16 AM 2/24 W + 2/24 W T16 10 Clean medium-sized room (T16) Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance MF= 0. < 19 < 16 < 22 < 16 < 25 < 19 < 25 < 19 < 22 < 19 AM 2/24 W T16 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.5 m (1/54 W.6 over 50 m² 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 18 12 6 MELLOW LIGHT IV Microprismatic (surface-mounted) Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. 2/49 W) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 17 Floor area m2 .76 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity Max.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 40 AM 1/54 W T16 ML4 A AM 1/54 W T16 ML4 B AM 2/24 W T16 ML4 B AM 2/24 W + 2/24 W T16 ML4 B AM 2/40 W TC-L ML4 A AM 2/49 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv. 4.8 m (2/24 W + 2/24 W.2 1. axial spacing up to 180 200 6.9 m (2/24 W).2 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0. 5. 2/40 W).4 1.1 1. 8 6000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 4 m.1 • Ceiling Floor area 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.1 1.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 EC 2/24 W T16 MELLOW LIGHT IV – Louvre (surface-mounted/recessed) Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.7 m (2/24 W) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .4 1. axial spacing up to 4.2 1.3 30 12 6 Maintenance factor (MF) AC 2/35 W T16 20 AC 2/49 W T16 AC 2/54 W T16 10 Clean medium-sized room (T16) Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance MF= 0.6 40 18 EC 2/54 W T16 ML IV A AC 2/35 W T16 ML IV A AC 2/49 W T16 ML IV A AC 2/54 W T16 ML IV B EC 1/55 W TC-L M625 ML IV B EC 2/24 W T16 M625 ML IV A EC 2/54 W T16 M625 UGR_axial UGR_transv.2 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 18 / Chapter 6 24 EC 1/55 W TC-L Ceiling height: 3 m 50 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. 65° < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m2 over 50 m² 1. The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 18 12 6 MELLOW LIGHT IV – Grid-mesh controller Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 1.4 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 EB 2/24 W T16 40 ML IV A AB 2/35 W T16 ML IV A AB 2/49 W T16 ML IV A AB 2/54 W T16 ML IV B EB 1/55 W TC-L M625 ML IV B EB 2/24 W T16 M625 ML IV B EB 2/54 W T16 M625 UGR_axial UGR_transv. axial spacing up to 5.2 1.7 m (2/54 W EB) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 19 Floor area m2 .6 over 50 m² 1. < 19 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 19 < 22 < 22 EB 1/55 W TC-L AB 2/35 W T16 AB 2/54 W T16 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.4 m/4.8 6000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing.2 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area 60 (surface-mounted/recessed) X=4H Y=8H / S=0.3 30 EB 2/54 W T16 AB 2/49 W T16 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room (T16) Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance MF= 0. 6 over 50 m² 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.1 1.2 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 20 / Chapter 6 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.8 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .500 lx 300 lx 36 1/35 W SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID T16 Electronic ballast 30 24 1/54 W 2/28 W 2/35 W 2/54 W 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.2 1.4 1.77 4000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 4. 65° <13 <13 < 500 cd/m 2 <16 <13 < 1000 cd/m2 <16 <13 < 1000 cd/m2 <16 <13 < 1000 cd/m2 <16 <16 < 1000 cd/m2 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.3 18 12 6 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 40 SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID 1/35 W T16 SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID 1/54 W T16 SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID 2/28 W T16 SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID 2/35 W T16 SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID 2/54 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv. 2/28 W) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 21 Floor area m2 .8 m (4/14 W) or 4. 65° < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m2 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 24 18 12 6 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.2 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 1/28 W MIREL FEC2 T16 M600 30 1/35 W 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0. 1/35 W.1 • Ceiling Floor area over 50 m² 1.3 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0. 1/54 W.2 1.6 40 1/54 W 4/14 W 2/28 W MIREL FEC2 1/28 W T16 M600 MIREL FEC2 1/35 W T16 M600 MIREL FEC2 1/54 W T16 M600 MIREL FEC2 2/28 W T16 M600 MIREL FEC2 B 4/14 W T16 M600 UGR_axial UGR_transv.80 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity Continuous row spacing up 180 200 to 4.1 1.4 m (1/28 W.4 1. 25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 22 / Chapter 6 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. 1/35 W. 1/54 W.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.500 lx 300 lx 36 1/28 W MIREL FEC2 T16 M625 30 1/35 W 1/54 W 4/14 W 2/28 W 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0. 2/28 W) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m2 The Lighting Handbook .4 m (1/28 W.80 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity Continuous row spacing up 180 200 to 4.6 over 50 m² 1.2 1. 65° < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m2 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.4 1.2 1.8 m (4/14 W) or 4.3 24 18 12 6 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 40 MIREL FEC2 1/28 W T16 M625 MIREL FEC2 1/35 W T16 M625 MIREL FEC2 1/54 W T16 M625 MIREL FEC2 2/28 W T16 M625 MIREL FEC2 B 4/14 W T16 M625 UGR_axial UGR_transv.1 1. 9 m 180 200 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 23 Floor area m 2 .6 over 50 m² 1.80 2000 h 1 year 1 year 10 3 5 Uniformity Continuous row spacing up to 3.4 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.3 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.2 1. < 16 < 19 < 19 < 22 < 16 < 19 < 19 < 22 20 15 6 3/80 W 4/80 W Maintenance factor (MF) Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 25 12 9 2/80 W MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES-BWS 1/80 W T16 MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES-BWS 2/80 W T16 MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES-BWS 3/80 W T16 MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES-BWS 4/80 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 18 15 1/80 W MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES – BWS T16 30 (surface-mounted/recessed) Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. 4 1.5 m (1/49 W) or 3.80 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Max.2 1.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 24 / Chapter 6 24 1/49 W Ceiling height: 3 m 50 MIRAL FAC 1/28 W T16 MIRAL FAC 1/49 W T16 MIRAL FAC 2/54 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.9 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .1 1.6 over 50 m² 1.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 1/28 W MIRAL FAC T16 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. axial spacing up to 4.2 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. 65° < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 22 < 22 < 1000 cd/m2 40 18 12 6 30 2/54 W Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0. 65° < 16 < 16 < 200 cd/m2 < 16 < 16 < 200 cd/m2 < 16 < 16 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 1/28 W MIRAL FAC-ID T16 1-lamp 30 24 18 12 6 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.2 1. axial spacing up to 3.6 over 50 m² 1.2 1.5 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 25 Floor area m2 .3 40 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.78 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Max.1 1.4 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 1/35 W 1/49 W 1/54 W MIRAL FAC-ID 1/28 W T16 MIRAL FAC-ID 1/35 W T16 MIRAL FAC-ID 1/49 W T16 MIRAL FAC-ID 1/54 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv. 78 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Max.6 MIRAL FAC-ID T16 2-lamp Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area over 50 m² 1. 65° < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m2 40 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0. axial spacing up to 3.1 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 26 / Chapter 6 2/28 W 2/35 W 2/49 W 2/54 W Ceiling height: 3 m 50 MIRAL FAC-ID 2/28 W T16 MIRAL FAC-ID 2/35 W T16 MIRAL FAC-ID 2/49 W T16 MIRAL FAC-ID 2/54 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.4 1.5 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .2 1.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.2 1.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 18 12 6 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. 6 over 50 m² 1.4 1.1 1.2 1. 65° < 500 cd/m 2 < 13 < 13 < 500 cd/m 2 < 16 < 13 < 13 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 30 2/35 W 2/54 W Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.0 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 27 Floor area m2 .79 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 4.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.2 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 1/35 W CLARIS II MD-ID T16 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 24 18 12 6 CLARIS II MD-ID 1/35 W T16 CLARIS II MD-ID 1/54 W T16 CLARIS II MD-ID 2/35 W T16 CLARIS II MD-ID 2/54 W T16 40 1/54 W UGR_axial UGR_transv. 2 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .500 lx 300 lx Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 28 / Chapter 6 1/28 W Ceiling height: 3 m CLARIS II MD-D 1/28 W T16 CLARIS II MD-D 1/49 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.79 4000 h 1 year 2 years 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 1/49 W 86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 Uniformity Continuous row spacing up to 4.6 over 50 m² 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.3 CLARIS II MD-D T16 X=4H Y=8H / S=0. 65° < 19 < 19 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 1000 cd/m2 Maintenance factor (MF) Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.1 1.2 1.4 1.2 1. 65° < 1500 cd/m2 < 13 < 13 < 16 < 16 < 13 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 16 < 16 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.4 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 29 Floor area m2 .1 1.6 over 50 m² 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 24 1/54 W CLARIS II MC-ID 1/35 W T16 CLARIS II MC-ID 1/54 W T16 CLARIS II MC-ID 2/35 W T16 CLARIS II MC-ID 2/54 W T16 40 18 2/35 W 2/54 W UGR_axial UGR_transv.2 1.4 1.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 5.3 30 12 6 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 1/35 W CLARIS II MC-ID T16 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.2 1. 2 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.6 over 50 m² 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 CLARIS II P-ID 1/35 W T16 CLARIS II P-ID 1/54 W T16 CLARIS II P-ID 1/49 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 1/54 W 1/49 W CLARIS II P-ID T16 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.4 1.3 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .2 1.3 60 30 / Chapter 6 1/35 W X=4H Y=8H / S=0. 65° < 1000 cd/m 2 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 16 < 19 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 40 18 12 6 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.1 1.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 5. 79 4000 h 1 year 2 years 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 1/49 W 86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 Uniformity 200 Continuous row spacing up to 5. 65° < 22 < 22 1000 cd/m2 < 25 < 25 1000 cd/m2 1/28 W Maintenance factor (MF) Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.4 1.2 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.2 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 Chapter 6 / 31 Floor area m2 .2 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m CLARIS II P-D 1/28 W T16 CLARIS II P-D 1/49 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.1 1.3 CLARIS II P-D T16 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.6 over 50 m² 1. 2 1.4 1.78 2000 h 1 year 1 year 86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 Uniformity Axial spacing up to 3.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.3 2LIGHT E1-Mini/TC-TELI/HIT and E3 TC-L X=4H Y=8H / S=0.4 m (1/42 W).25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 32 / Chapter 6 1/75 W FL-S 1/20 W S 1/42 W Ceiling height: 3 m 2LIGHT 1/75 W FL-S 2LIGHT 1/20 W S 2LIGHT 1/42 W E1 TC-TELI 2LIGHT 1/70 W E1 HIT G8.2 1. up to 3.500 lx 300 lx Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.5 2LIGHT 1/80 W E3 TC-L 2LIGHT 2/55 W E3 TC-L UGR_axial UGR_transv. 55° / *65° / **75° *200 cd/m 2 < 16 < 16 1000 cd/m 2 < 16 < 16 < 19 < 19 *1000 cd/m 2 200 cd/m 2 < 19 < 16 < 19 < 19 **1000 cd/m 2 **1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 22 Maintenance factor (MF) 1/80 W 2/55 W 1/70 W 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation (1/75 1000 h) Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.9 m (1/80 W) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Floor area m2 The Lighting Handbook .1 1.6 over 50 m² 1. The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 1/35 W RTX II C or D Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.3 m 1-lamp.4 1. 50 24 18 12 6 40 1/49 W 1/54 W 2/35 W 2/54 W RTX2 1/35 W + D RTX2 1/49 W + D RTX2 1/54 W + D RTX2 2/35 W + D RTX2 2/54 W + D < 16 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 16 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 22 65° < 200 cd/m2 < 200 cd/m2 < 200 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.2 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m UGR_axial UGR_transv.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.78 6000 h 1 year 2 years Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 4.6 over 50 m² 1. up to 4 m 2-lamp 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 33 Floor area m2 .1 1.2 1. 1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.2 1.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 1/35 W RTX II C-ID T16 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.2 1.79 4000 h 1 year 2 years Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 4.4 1.9 m 2-lamp 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 34 / Chapter 6 24 18 12 6 1/49 W 2/35 W 2/54 W Ceiling height: 3 m 50 RTX2 C-ID 1/35 W T16 RTX2 C-ID 1/49 W T16 RTX2 C-ID 2/35 W T16 RTX2 C-ID 2/54 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv. up to 3.1 1.5 m 1-lamp. 65° < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2 40 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.6 over 50 m² 1. 7 2.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 18 15 12 9 6 3 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. <13 <13 < 1500 cd/m2 <13 <13 < 1500 cd/m2 <13 <13 <13 <13 15 L-FIELDS 3/55 W Maintenance factor (MF) KAREA 4/55 W 10 LANOS 4/55 W L-FIELDS 3/80 W 5 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.5 • Ceiling Floor area over 50 m² 1.72 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Max.3 1.2 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 35 Floor area m2 .5 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 25 20 LIGHT FIELDS-S 3/55 W TC-L LIGHT FIELDS-S 3/80 W TC-L KAREA-S SYM 4/55 W TC-L LANOS-S SYM 4/55 W TC-L 65° UGR_axial UGR_transv.3 1.4 1.2 Free-standing uplights Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. axial spacing up to 7. 25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 36 / Chapter 6 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.4 1.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 1/54 W TECTON(-I) + RW T16 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 1.80 6000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Axial spacing up to 5.1 • Ceiling Floor area 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.3 18 12 6 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 TECTON 1/54 W T16 + RW TECTON 1/54 W T16+PK+RW TECTON 2/54 W T16 + RW TECTON-I 2/54 W T16 + R UGR_axial UGR_transv.8 m (-I 2/54 W+R) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .6 m/4.2 1.6 over 50 m² 1. < 28 < 25 < 28 < 22 < 28 < 28 < 25 < 25 40 1/54 W+PK 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 2/54 W -I 2/54 W 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.2 1. 1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.80 6000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Axial spacing up to 5.6 m/4. < 28 < 25 < 28 < 22 < 28 < 28 < 25 < 25 40 30 12 6 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 2/80 W -I 2/80 W 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.6 over 50 m² 1.1 1.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.2 1.8 m (-I 2/80 W+R) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 37 Floor area m2 .2 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 18 1/80 W+PK 1/80 W TECTON(-I) + RW T16 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 TECTON 1/80 W T16 + RW TECTON 1/80 W T16+PK+RW TECTON 2/80 W T16 + RW TECTON-I 2/80 W T16 + R UGR_axial UGR_transv.4 1. 3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.2 1.2 1. < 22 < 19 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 40 30 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.6 over 50 m² 1.4 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .1 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 38 / Chapter 6 18 12 6 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 TECTON-IP 1/54 W T16 TECTON-IP 1/80 W T16 TECTON-IP 2/54 W T16 TECTON-IP 2/80 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.80 6000 h 2 years 2 years Uniformity 180 200 Axial spacing up to 4.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 1/54 W 1/80 W 2/54 W 2/80 W TECTON-IP Louvre T16 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.4 1. 2 1.79 4000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 4.6 over 50 m² 1.2 1.5 m for ML-B and up to 3.9 m for ML-C 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 39 Floor area m2 .4 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 TECTON D ML-B 2/54 W TECTON D ML-B 2/49 W TECTON D ML-C 2/49 W TECTON D ML-C 2/54 W UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° < 1000 cd/m 2 < 22 < 22 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2 40 18 ML-B 2/54 W ML-C 2/49 W 30 12 6 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 ML-C 2/54 W 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.1 1.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 ML-B 2/49 W TECTON D-ML-B and ML-C Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. 1 1.2 1.7 1.2 1. D-I up to 7 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .4 1.5 Ceiling height: 3 m 25 TECTON D-ID 2/54 W T16 TECTON D-ID 2/80 W T16 TECTON D-I 2/54 W T16 TECTON D-I 2/80 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.500 lx 300 lx 18 15 height 2/54 W + I 2/54 W + ID 2/80 W + I 2/80 W + ID TECTON D-ID and -I Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. 65° < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 < 13 < 13 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 13 < 13 < 1000 cd/m 2 20 15 Maintenance factor (MF) 10 5 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Wartung (D-I 1/2 year) Room maintenance MF= 0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 40 / Chapter 6 12 9 6 3 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² ID I 1.3 1.5 for D-I) • Ceiling Floor area 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.2 over 50 m² ID I 1.79 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing D-ID up to 4.2 1.6 2.2 m.4 1.25 (1.3 1. 3 15 6 3 Maintenance factor (MF) 10 5 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 25 12 9 2/80 W TECTON D-PL 2/35 W T16 TECTON D-PL 2/49 W T16 TECTON D-PL 2/80 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.1 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 18 15 2/35 W TECTON D-PL (Pool-Light) Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.2 1.6 over 50 m² 1.4 1.77 2000 h 1 year 1 year Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 6 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 41 Floor area m 2 .2 1. 65° < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2 < 19 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2 20 2/49 W height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. 79 (HIE) 4000 h 1 year 1 year MF=0. 65° < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/ m2 < 16 < 19 < 1000 cd/ m2 20 1/250 W HIE 15 1/250 W HSE 10 Uniformity Axial spacing up to 5 m (TST) 5 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .1 Maintenance factor (MF) 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.83 (HSE) 8000 h 3 years 3 years Ceiling height: 6 m 25 1/250 W HIE RAB 19000 lm TST 1/250 W HSE RAB 25000 lm TST UGR_axial UGR_transv. (IP65) Room maintenance MF=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 42 / Chapter 6 12 9 6 3 Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of lumin.500 lx 300 lx 18 15 COPA I 250 W Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. 83 (HSE) 8000 h 3 years 3 years 1/400 W HIE 10 HSE** 1/400 W HSE* Uniformity Axial spacing up to 8.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 6 m 25 12 9 6 3 1/400 W HIE RAB 36000 lm 1/400 W HSE RAB 36000 lm* 1/400 W HSE RAB 47000 lm** UGR_axial UGR_transv. (IP65) Room maintenance MF=0. 65°/75° < 19 75°< 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 75°< 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 16 < 16 65°< 1000 cd/m2 20 15 Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of lumin.70 (HIE) 2000 h 1 year 1 year MF=0.1 Maintenance factor (MF) 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.3 m * (Colour rendition Ra > 60) ** (Colour rendition Ra > 20) 1/400 W 5 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Chapter 6 / 43 Floor area m 2 .The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 18 15 COPA I 400 W Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. 78 Lamp operation 2000 h Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) 1 year Room maintenance 2 years Ceiling height: 4 m 50 1/32 W 40 COPA D 1/32 W RKF/RKID COPA D 1/42 W RKF/RKID COPA D 1/57 W RKF COPA D 1/57 W RKID COPA D 1/85 W RKF COPA D 1/85 W RKID UGR_axial UGR_transv.4 COPA D RKF/RKID 32/42/57/85 W Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. 65° / 75° < 16 65°< 200 cd/m2 < 16 < 19 75°< 200 cd/m2 < 19 < 25 < 25 < 22 75°< 1000 cd/m2 < 22 < 19 65°< 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 < 19 65°< 1000 cd/m2 1/42 W 30 1/57 W 1/85 W 20 10 Uniformity 180 200 Axial spacing up to 5 m.2 1.4 m (42 W RKF). up to 5.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 18 12 6 height 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.7 m (42 W RKID.1 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area over 50 m² 1. RKID) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m2 The Lighting Handbook . 57 W RKF.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 44 / Chapter 6 Maintenance factor (MF) Clean medium-sized room MF= 0.2 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0. up to 5. 65° / *75° < 19 < 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 22 < 22 *< 1000 cd/m2 20 15 Maintenance factor (MF) Clean medium-sized room MF= 0.1 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 18 15 1/70 W COPA D HIT 70/150 W Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.2 1.2 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.4 over 50 m² 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 4 m 25 12 9 6 3 COPA D 1/70 W HIT (6400 lm) COPA D 1/150 W HIT (14000 lm) UGR_axial UGR_transv.77 (HCI) Lamp operation 2000 h Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) 1 year Room maintenance 2 years 10 1/150 W 5 Uniformity Axial spacing up to 4 m 180 200 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 45 Floor area m2 . 50 COPA D 1/250 W QT < 19 < 19 65° <1000 cd/m2 40 30 Maintenance factor (MF) Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) Room maintenance MF= 0.500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 1/250 W COPA D 250 W QT Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.2 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.1 1.5 m 180 200 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .2 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.76 1000 h 1 year 2 years 20 10 Uniformity Axial spacing up to 4.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 46 / Chapter 6 18 12 6 Ceiling height: 4 m UGR_axial UGR_transv.4 over 50 m² 1. < 28 < 28 < 28 < 25 < 28 < 28 < 25 20 9 6 3 12 15 2/250 W HST 2/250 W HIT Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of lumin.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 6 m 25 1/250 W HIT 1/250 W HST COPA A-B 1/250 W HIT (20000 lm) COPA A-B 1/250 W HST (23000 lm) COPA A-B 2/250 W HIT (40000 lm) COPA A-B 2/250 W HST (46000 lm) UGR_axial UGR_transv.1 Maintenance factor (MF) 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0. up to 8. up to 9 m 1/250 W HIT 5 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Chapter 6 / 47 Floor area m 2 . (IP65) Room maintenance MF=0.3 m 2/250 W HIT.5 m HST.81 (HST) 14000 h 1 year 2 years 10 Uniformity Axial spacing up to: 7.80 (HIT) 2000 h 1 year 2 years MF=0.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 18 15 COPA A-B HIT/HST 250 W Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. < 28 < 28 < 28 < 28 20 9 6 1/400 W HST 15 Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of lumin. (IP65) Room maintenance MF=0.67 (HIT) 1000 h 1 year 2 years MF=0.500 lx 300 lx 18 15 COPA A-B HIT/HST 400 W Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 48 / Chapter 6 12 1/400 W HIT Ceiling height: 6 m 25 COPA A_B 1/400 W HIT (32000 lm) * COPA A_B 1/400 W HST (48000 lm) ** UGR_axial UGR_transv.1 Maintenance factor (MF) 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.81 (HST) 14000 h 1 year 2 years 10 3 Uniformity Axial spacing up to 9 m * (Colour rendition Ra > 90) ** (Colour rendition Ra > 20) 5 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook . The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 COPA A-N HME Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 Maintenance factor (MF) 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0. < 28 < 28 < 29 < 29 40 18 1/400 W 30 12 6 Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) Room maintenance MF= 0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 6 m 50 24 1/250 W COPA A-N 1/250 W HME (13000 lm) COPA A-N 1/400 W HME (22000 lm) UGR_axial UGR_transv.80 2000 h 1 year 2 years 20 Uniformity Axial spacing up to 9 m 10 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Chapter 6 / 49 Floor area m 2 . 1 Maintenance factor (MF) 10 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 50 / Chapter 6 4 3 A-T 1/600 W Ceiling height: 6 m UGR_axial UGR_transv. A-T. 8 COPA A-B 1/600 W HST COPA A-T 1/600 W HST COPA A-ASY 1/600 W HST < 25 < 28 6 Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) Room maintenance MF= 0.3 m (ASY).5 m (A-B) 2 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook . A-ASY HST Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.500 lx 300 lx 6 5 COPA A-B.83 10000 h 2 years 2 years 4 2 1 A-B 1/600 W A-ASY 1/600 W Uniformity Axial spacing up to 6. up to 7. 81 (HST) 14000 h 2 years 2 years 10 1/400 W HST 5 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Chapter 6 / 51 Floor area m 2 .1 Maintenance factor (MF) 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 6 m 25 12 1/250 W HST 1/400 W HIT COPA A-ASY 1/250 W HIT (20000 lm) COPA A-ASY 1/250 W HST (27000 lm) COPA A-ASY 1/400 W HIT (32000 lm) COPA A-ASY 1/400 W HST (48000 lm) 20 9 6 3 1/250 W HIT 15 Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) Room maintenance MF= 0.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 18 15 COPA A-ASY HIT/HST Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1. 25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 52 / Chapter 6 (O) MF= 0.79 (D) 4000 h 2 years 2 years PERLUCE D/O X=4H Y=8H / S=0. 65° < 16 < 16 <1000 cd/m 2 < 16 < 19 <1000 cd/m 2 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 19 Uniformity Axial spacing up to 3.500 lx 300 lx Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25) Maintenance factor (MF) (D) Clean large room Lamp operation Cleaning of lumin.83 (O) 2000 h 1 year 1 year O 2/18 W TC-L Ceiling height: 3 m PERLUCE D 1/49 W T16 PERLUCE D 1/80 W T16 PERLUCE O 2/18 W TC-L PERLUCE O 1/49 W T16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.1 (O=1.5 m (O) 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 O 1/49 W T16 D 1/49 W T16 D 1/80 W T16 86 80 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 200 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .9 m (D) and up to 6. (IP65) Room maintenance MF= 0. 2 1.6 RAIN Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 RAIN 1/58 W T 26 RAIN 1/80 W T 16 RAIN 2/36 W T 26 RAIN 2/54 W T 16 UGR_axial UGR_transv.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.1 1.78 6000 h 1 year 2 years Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 8 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 53 Floor area m 2 .4 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area over 50 m² 1. < 28 < 22 < 29 < 25 < 28 < 22 < 29 < 22 40 30 1/58 W T26 1/80 W T16 2/54 W T16 Maintenance factor (MF) 20 2/36 W T26 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance MF= 0.2 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 18 12 6 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. 2 1.2 1.5 m.500 lx 300 lx 54 48 42 36 1/55 W CHIARO FTR390/FTR680 T16-R Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.6 over 50 m² 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area 90 X=4H Y=8H / S=0. < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 < 22 60 50 1/40 W 40 Maintenance factor (MF) 30 2/40 W 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Luminaire maintenance Room maintenance MF= 0.4 1.1 1.76 6000 h 1 year 2 years Uniformity Axial spacing up to 4.3 22+ 40 W 80 Ceiling height: 3 m 70 CHIARO FTR 1/40 W T16-R CHIARO FTR 1/55 W T16-R CHIARO FTR 1/22 W+40W T16-R CHIARO FTR 2/40 W T16-R UGR_axial UGR_transv.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 54 / Chapter 6 30 24 18 12 6 180 200 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. up to 5 m 2/40 W 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook . 6 SCUBA T26 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 25 SCUBA 1/36 W T26 SCUBA 1/58 W T26 SCUBA 2/36 W T26 SCUBA 2/58 W T26 UGR_axial UGR_transv.4 1.2 1.25 • Ceiling Floor area over 50 m² 1.3 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.1 1.78 6000 h 1 year 2 years Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 8.2 1.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 18 12 6 height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.5 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 55 Floor area m2 . < 22 < 19 < 25 < 19 < 25 < 19 < 25 < 22 20 1/36 W 15 1/58 W 2/36 W Maintenance factor (MF) 10 2/58 W 5 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance MF= 0. 500 lx 300 lx 18 C-O 4/24 W T16 CLEAN C-O/R 15 12 C-O 3/40 W TC-L 30 X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 56 / Chapter 6 Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.6 over 50 m² 1.78 3000 h 2 years 2 years Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 4. with 3/55 W up to 3.2 1.5 m.2 1.3 9 C-R 3/55 W TC-L Ceiling height: 3 m 25 CLEAN C-O 4/24 W T16 CLEAN C-O 3/40 W TC-L CLEAN C-R 3/55 W TC-L UGR_axial UGR_transv. < 22 < 22 < 25 < 25 < 19 < 22 20 15 6 3 Maintenance factor (MF) 10 5 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation (-O = 4000 h) Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance MF= 0.4 1.9 m 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .1 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. 2 1.2 1.6 over 50 m² 1.5 m (2/49 W A-O). 65° < 1000 cd/m2 < 16 < 19 < 22 < 22 < 19 < 19 75° < 1000 cd/m2 < 19 < 19 75° < 1000 cd/m2 40 18 12 6 30 A-C 3/40 W TC-L A-C 2/49 W T16 A-C 3/55 W TC-L Maintenance factor (MF) 20 10 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation (TC-L 3000 h) Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance MF= 0.The Lighting Handbook 500 lx 300 lx 36 30 24 A-O 2/49 W T16 CLEAN A-C/O Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.9 m (2/49 W A-C).4 1. up to 4.78 4000 h (T16) 2 years 2 years Uniformity Continuous row spacing up 180 200 to 3.1 1.3 60 X=4H Y=8H / S=0. up to 4.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m 50 CLEAN A-C 2/49 W T16 CLEAN A-O 2/49 W T16 CLEAN A-C 3/40 W TC-L CLEAN A-C 3/55 W TC-L 65°/75° UGR_axial UGR_transv.2 m (TC-L) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Chapter 6 / 57 Floor area m 2 .1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1. 500 lx 300 lx 18 15 12 S-R 2/49 W CLEAN S-C/R Correction factors • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 • Ceiling Floor area height 4m 5m 6m up to 50 m² 1.2 1.6 over 50 m² 1.79 4000 h 2 years 2 years Uniformity 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 3.5 m (2/49 S-R) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Floor area m 2 The Lighting Handbook .3 30 58 / Chapter 6 9 S-C 3/49 W S-C 3/80 W X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 Ceiling height: 3 m UGR_axial UGR_transv. 25 CLEAN S-C 3/49 W CLEAN S-C 3/80 W CLEAN S-R 2/49 W < 16 < 19 < 22 < 19 < 19 < 22 75° < 1000 cd/m 2 < 1000 cd/m 2 20 15 6 3 Maintenance factor (MF) 10 5 Clean medium-sized room Lamp operation Cleaning of luminaires Room maintenance MF= 0.9 m and up to 4.1 1.2 1.4 1. . . . . . . . Fire protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explosion-proofness . . . . . . Chemical effects on materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clean-room technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short-circuit protection and loading of circuits . . . . . . . . Degrees of protection . . . . . . Requirements concerning safety – ball-proofness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low-voltage installations . . . .Chapter 7 Technical information Protection classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3–5 6–7 8–9 10 11 – 13 14 – 16 17 – 24 25 – 27 . . . . Class I luminaires Class I is not identified by a symbol. for instance moisture-proof batten luminaires and moisture-proof diffuser luminaires. PRIO low-voltage spotlights.) – Its sealing against the ingress of water The Lighting Handbook Chapter 7 / 3 . Class III luminaires Class III identifies luminaires that are intended for operation with protective extra low voltage (50 V max. e.Protection classes ZUMTOBEL luminaires are classified into the following protection classes – a measure intended to afford protection against electric shock. Most ZUMTOBEL luminaires are designed in accordance with protection class I unless otherwise stated. stones.). ZUMTOBEL architectural luminaires include class III luminaires. the luminaire is intended to be connected to a protective earth conductor which bears the mark. sand. The ZUMTOBEL range includes protection class II luminaires. Protection class I Protection class II Protection class III Degrees of protection Degrees of protection indicate the following properties of equipment: – The quality of its protection against direct contact – Its sealing against ingress of solid foreign bodies (dust.g. etc. Class II luminaires Class II luminaires have total insulation but no protective earth terminal. 5 mm Protection against solid bodies > 1 mm Dust-protected (limited ingress of dust) Dust-tight (no ingress of dust) Protection against moisture as per second digit IP X0 IP X1 IP X2 IP X3 IP X4 IP X5 IP X6 IP X7 IP X8 No special protection Drip-proof – protection against water drops Protection against water drops up to 15º from the vertical Rainproof – protection against spray water up to 60º Splash-proof – protection against spray water from all directions Jet-proof – protection against jets of water Protection against heavy seas (conditions on ship decks) Watertight – protection against immersion (pressure and time specified) Protection against immersion under pressure (with instructions from manufacturer) 4 / Chapter 7 The Lighting Handbook . 2 3 Degrees of protection for technical luminaires Protection against ingress of solid foreign bodies as per first digit IP 0X IP 1X IP 2X IP 3X IP 4X IP 5X IP 6X Unprotected against ingress of solid foreign bodies Protection against solid bodies > 50 mm Protection against solid bodies > 12 mm Protection against solid bodies > 2. insertion of fingers or objects.The type of protection is defined by two degrees of protection in accordance with IEC 529: – Degree of shock-hazard protection and protection against ingress of solid foreign bodies (1st digit) – Degree of protection against the ingress of water (2nd digit) For example IP 23: IP INGRESS PROTECTION Protection against ingress of solid foreign bodies having Ø > 12 mm (medium-sized solid bodies). Protection against ingress of water falling at any angle up to 60º from vertical. There must be no adverse effect (spray water). maximum mesh size 60 mm Badminton courts Squash courts Indoor tennis courts Gymnasia and sports halls Chapter 7 / 5 .Applications for luminaires with increased protection Damp locations Bakeries Manure sheds Animal-feed preparation facilities Industrial kitchens Boiler rooms Commercial workshops Granaries (Deep-freeze) cold storage Pump houses Sculleries Laundries Wet locations Beer or wine cellars Shower cubicles Meat processing facilities Electroplating facilities Greenhouses Dairies Workshops using wet processes Car wash areas Agricultural facilities IP X1 IP X1 IP X1 IP X1 IP X1 IP 20 IP X1 IP X1 IP X1 IP X1 IP X1 IP X4 IP X4 IP X5 IP X4 IP X4 IP X4 IP X4 IP X4 The following generally applies: IP X5: for cleaning using water jets IP X4: in rinsing areas The following generally applies: IP X5: for cleaning using water jets Beer or wine cellars IP 44 Shower cubicles IP 44 Stores. feedstuff IP 44 Intensive stock farming IP 44 Animal sheds IP 44 Adjoining rooms of animal sheds IP 44 Facilities with increased fire risk Workrooms Woodworking Sawmills Paper processing Textile processing Treatment and fabrication Gymnasia and sports halls The Lighting Handbook The following generally applies: IP X5: for cleaning using water jets IP 54+FF: when increased fire risk IP 50 IP 50 IP 50 IP 50 IP 50 IP 50 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 ballproof luminaires ballproof luminaires with all-round cover. storerooms for hay. straw. g.Fire protection Luminaire identification marking The following criteria must be taken into account: – Position of normal use – Fire behaviour of environment and mounting surfaces – Minimum clearance from combustible substances and materials Luminaires with thecmark Luminaires which carry thecmark must be constructed so that the temperature on the mounting surface does not exceed 130 °C during abnormal operation. TheUmark introduced in EN 60598 has applied since 01. Luminaires with the q mark Luminaires which carry the q mark are intended for mounting in or on furniture made of materials whose flammability is not known. The materials may be painted. They are designed so that in normal operation any mounting surface or other adjacent furniture surfaces do not exceed a temperature of 95 °C. The temperature must not exceed 150 °C on vertical surfaces. Temperatures must not exceed 220 °C on vertical surfaces. and does not exceed 180 °C in the event of a ballast fault.08. The maximum temperature in the event of a fault is 115 °C. Luminaires with this mark are suitable for direct mounting on parts of buildings made of non-combustible. 08. External surfaces on which readily flammable substances such as dust or fibrous materials may accumulate when luminaires are installed as prescribed must not exceed specific temperatures. They are designed so that in the event of a ballast fault.1998. in corners of wooden furniture. The d mark limits the temperature on horizontal surfaces to 95 °C during normal operation and 115 °C in the event of a ballast fault. A validity transition period allows the d mark to be used until 01. e. veneered or varnished. The d luminaire mark was withdrawn in 1999. 2005. Luminaires with the d/Umark Both marks regulate the surface temperatures of luminaires. Luminaires with theQmark Luminaires which carry theQmark are intended for installation in furniture. flame-retardant and normally flammable materials as specified in DIN 4102 cannot be ignited. In order to fulfil the criteria of the Umark. the same as for the d mark. 6 / Chapter 7 The Lighting Handbook . flame-retardant or normally flammable building materials according to DIN 4102. the surface temperature on horizontal surfaces must not exceed 90 °C. Fire protection: Place of use – Mark – Requirements The Lighting Handbook Chapter 7 / 7 Explosion-proofness Flammable gases, vapours and mists Zone O: A hazardous explosive atmosphere is present continuously or long term. Zone 1: A hazardous explosive atmosphere can be expected to occur occasionally. Zone 2: A hazardous explosive atmosphere can be expected to occur only rarely and, if any, short term. Combustible dusts Zone 20 includes areas in which there is a permanent, longterm or frequent explosive atmosphere consisting of dust-air mixtures. Zone 21 includes areas in which an explosive atmosphere consisting of dust-air mixtures can be expected to occur occasionally and short term. Zone 22 includes areas in which an explosive atmosphere cannot be expected to occur due to disturbance of deposited dust. If an explosive atmosphere should nevertheless occur, this will most probably happen only rarely and short term. Directive 94/9/EC The “new” Directive 94/9/EC specifies the requirements for all devices and protection systems for use in explosion-prone areas. Over and above this, this Directive now directly includes the “basic safety requirements” for explosion-proof equipment. Manufacturers of explosion-proof equipment have to provide evidence of a quality assurance system to be tested by a “notified body”. 8 / Chapter 7 The Lighting Handbook Directive 99/92 EC (Workplace Directive) Also new is the description of hazard areas in explosion-prone workplaces, and a resulting graded safety profile for the “equipment” used. As this Directive was drafted according to the EC’s “new approach”, the manufacturer’s declaration of conformity, combined with CE marking of the products, was introduced for explosion-proof equipment as well. A detailed commentary on Directive 94/9/EC is included in the “Directive 94/9/EC by the European Parliament and the Council of 23 March 1994” section. Since 1 July 2003, it has superseded all directives on explosion protection previously effective at European level. Please note: The previous standard on construction and testing of explosion-proof equipment for Zone 2 has been superseded by ILC 60079-15/EN 60079-15, which specifies higher requirements for Zone 2 luminaires (higher requirements in terms of electronic ballasts and impact resistance). Equipment of Group 2 including potential ignition source Equipment cat. 1 Equipment cat. 2 Electrical appliance Equipment cat. 3 Yes No Engine with internal combustion EC type examination Documentation of notified body Documentation of manufacturer Internal production control Basic safety and health requirements Classification of max. surface temperatures in electrical equipment of Class 2 Temperature class T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Max. permissible surface temperature of equipment in °C 450 300 200 135 100 85 Ignition temperatures of flammable substances in °C > 450 > 300 ≤ 450 > 300 ≤ 200 > 200 ≤ 135 > 100 ≤ 135 > 85 ≤ 100 The Lighting Handbook Chapter 7 / 9 Requirements concerning safety – ball-proofness Luminaires for sports halls must be ball-proof according to DIN VDE 0710-13. Balls hitting luminaires must not damage them so as to cause luminaire parts to fall down. In a test conforming with the relevant standard, the luminaire has to withstand 36 hits from three directions at a maximum impact speed of 60 km/h, the ball used having the size of a handball. When choosing the luminaires, the rod guard’s grid width must be matched to the sport played in the hall: it must always be considerably smaller than the balls used, never of the same size, as balls may get stuck in the guard. As ball-proof luminaires, the ZUMTOBEL range includes the RAS/RES-BWS louvre luminaire as well as the COPA-A high-bay luminaire. 10 / Chapter 7 The Lighting Handbook Clean-room technology Clean-room compatibility tested CLEAN Advanced and CLEAN Supreme have been tested and assessed by the Fraunhofer Institute in Stuttgart (Germany) with respect to – clean-room compatibility for clean-rooms (particle emission behaviour of the luminaires) and – cleanliness compatibility (disinfectability, electrostatic behaviour and chemical resistance). Details on clean-room compatibility: The German VDI 2083 Guideline specifies a standardised procedure for all equipment used in a clean-room. The common criterion for the clean-room compatibility of luminaires and all other equipment is their particle emission behaviour. “Airborne particle emission” is used as a classification criterion in all international standards. The relevant maximum value for the permissible concentration of particles of a specific particle size constitutes the class limit. Test setup A defined volume of air is aspirated by an air sampling probe and fed into a test chamber. The particles inside this test chamber are monitored and recorded appropriately. Exceeding the relevant limit values is decisive in order to classify the luminaires. If a limit value is not exceeded with a certainty of at least 95 %, the respective item of equipment may be regarded as suitable for use in this air cleanliness class. The Lighting Handbook Chapter 7 / 11 Details on cleanliness compatibility: In order to be able to confirm cleanliness compatibility as well as quantities reflecting clean-room compatibility that can be detected by metrological methods, additional expert assessments and parameters were included in the tests conducted by the Fraunhofer Institute IPA. Cleanliness compatibility covers a large number of sector-based cleanliness requirements such as resistance to chemicals, surface quality, flow behaviour or electrostatic charge characteristics. These are defined in the following standards and codes of practice, among others: Standardisation General: – classification of air cleanliness – clean-rooms and associated controlled environments according to DIN EN ISO 14644-1 (Federal Standard 209 has been withdrawn) – clean-room technology and clean-room compatibility of equipment VDI 2083 – EHEDG (European Hygienic Engineering & Design Group) Industrial application areas: – GMP Guidelines (Good Manufacturing Practice) – pharmaceuticals – FDA (Food and Drug Administration) – pharmaceuticals and foodstuffs – Medicinal Product Law – EU Pharmaceutical Regulation – Good manufacturing practices Volume 4 – (Medicinal products for human and veterinary use) – Hazard Analytical Control Point (HACCP) Regulations – foodstuffs Hospital application areas: – VDI 2167 Building services in hospitals – DIN 1946-4 Ventilation and air conditioning Part 4 (Ventilation in hospitals) 12 / Chapter 7 The Lighting Handbook clean-room Classes C to E and ISO Classes 6 to 9 can be achieved using this airflow system. Clean-rooms with low-turbulence displacement flow. which are more expensive to build. The CLEAN clean-room luminaire has been designed for use in all clean-room classes with a turbulent mixed airflow. allow air to initially enter the cleanroom with low turbulence. Cleanrooms in ISO Classes 1 to 6 and GMP Classes A and B are areas where this airflow system is used. The Lighting Handbook Chapter 7 / 13 . The laminar flow system minimises contamination. and any contaminant is quickly eliminated. thereby causing continuous dilution and “cleaning”. The design of laminar flow cleanrooms precludes the use of any luminaires other than extremely slim batten luminaires which disrupt the directional flow of air as little as possible.Airflow systems in clean-rooms: One of the basic criteria for the requirements placed on equipment in clean-rooms is the nature of the airflow system. air enters the room with a turbulent flow. In this commonly encountered airflow system. According to GMP (Good Manufacturing Practice) classification. cover. closures. The effects of chemicals vary widely and take up entire volumes of resistance tables. meat processing. etc. – The ambient temperature is 22 °C.). Chemical composition The chemical composition should be discussed with every operator. seal. Applications The following applications are just a few examples of situations in which material damage may occur: – Chemical and petrochemical industry – Foodstuffs industry (cheese production. What are the key factors? 1. breweries) – Agriculture – Fishing industry – Kitchens and industrial cooking facilities – Car wash facilities – Production facilities and workshops using a high level of oil and grease 3. 2. The table on the opposite page can therefore only give a brief overview of effects of some frequently occurring chemicals and is subject to the following conditions: – The chemical substance listed in the table is a basic material and not part of a chemical compound. Luminaire materials A luminaire consists of several parts having different functions and which are therefore made from different materials (base plate. dairies. Degree of saturation of chemical substances 14 / Chapter 7 The Lighting Handbook . Ambient temperature Depending on the type and composition of the substances. chemical reactions will take place over a range of temperatures. cable inlets. 4. A great many complaints could be avoided if due consideration were given during the planning stage to the situation in which the luminaire is going to be used.Chemical effects on materials No material is resistant to all chemical influences. We should be glad to provide further advice if you have any questions or doubts about the resistance of any materials. 5. – = not resistant Chapter 7 / 15 .Chemical substance in question Stainless Alusteel minium Poly.. • = resistant to limited extent. crude oil Dioxan Ether Ethyl acetate (ester) Glycerine Glycol Glysantin Hydrochloric acid up to 20 % above 20 % Hydrogen peroxide up to 40 % over 40 % • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • – – • • • – • • • • • • • • • • • – • • • – – • • • • • • • • • – • • • • • – • • • – – • • • – • – • • • • – – – • • • – • • • • • – – • – – • – • • – – • • – • – • • – • • – – • – – – • • • • • – • • • – • – • – – – • • – • – • • – – – – – • – – – • • • • • • • • = resistant. concentrated Aliphatic hydrocarbons Ammonia 25 % Aniline Aromatic hydrocarbons Battery acid Beer Benzene Blood Bromic acid Carbon dioxide Carbon monoxide Carbon tetrachloride Caustic soda solution 2 % Caustic soda solution 10 % Chloroform Chlorophenol Diesel oil.Polymeth.Polyester acrylate.carbonate The Lighting Handbook Acetic acid up to 5 % Acetic acid up to 30 % Acetone Alcohol up to 30 % Alcohol. – = not resistant 16 / Chapter 7 The Lighting Handbook .Polymeth..Chemical substance in question Stainless Alusteel minium Poly.carbonate Ketones Lime milk Lysol Methylene chloride Methanol Metal salts and their aqueous solutions Naphtha (cleaner’s naphtha) Petrolium ether Pyridine Phenol Nitric acid up to 10 % up to 20 % above 20 % Sea water Soap-suds Soda Sodium chloride solution Sulphuretted hydrogen Sulphuric acid up to 50 % up to 70 % above 70 % Sulphurous acid up to 5 % Synthetic detergents Turpentine Water up to 60°C Xylene • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • – – – • • • • • • – • • • – • • • • – – • • • – • • – – – • • • • • – • – – – • • • – – • • – • • • • • • • – • • • • – – • – – – • • • – – • • – • • • • • • • – • • • • – – • – – – • • • – – • • – • • • • • • • – – • • • – • = resistant. • = resistant to limited extent.Polyester acrylate. . a larger number of units may be possible.5 mm2 15 15 8 8 4 6 4 B13 1. = shunt p.k.5 mm2 25 25 18 18 7 13 7 B20 2.k./p. 1/18 W T26 44/53 73/86 1/36–38 W T26 38/53 63/86 1/58 W T26 25/34 40/56 1/5–7 W TC-S 83/135 136/221 1/9 W TC-S 93/135 153/221 1/11 W TC-S 104/135 170/221 1/10–13 W TC-D 72/122 119/200 1/18 W TC-D/-T 62/91 102/149 1/26 W TC-D/-T 43/68 71/112 1/18 W TC-L/-F 44/53 73/86 1/24 W TC-L/-F 41/53 68/86 1/36 W TC-L/-F 38/53 62/86 n./p. n.Short-circuit protection and loading of circuits Miniature circuit breakers Trip characteristic B C D Rangeh over 3 ln to 5 ln over 5 ln to 10 ln over 10 ln to 20 ln Maximum number of fluorescent lamps per miniature circuit breaker Number of fluorescent lamps with conventional or low-loss ballast for different lamp circuits C10 C16 n.k.k.k.k.5 mm2 40 40 25 25 14 18 14 C16 1. correction (inductive) B10 B16 B20 n./p. Chapter 7 / 17 . k../p./p.f.ATCO PCI series.5 mm2 50 50 36 36 20 26 20 C20 2. correction Loading of automatic circuit breakers for metal halide lamps – Maximum recommended number of electronic ballasts per automatic circuit breaker Electronic ballasts for metal halide lamps.5 mm2 20 20 14 14 6 10 6 B16 1. non-dimmable (TRIDONIC.f.k. n. A101/A201/A202) C10 1.5 mm2 60 60 42 42 20 30 20 B10 1.k. n. except for PCI.k. 27/32 43/51 53/63 23/32 37/51 46/63 15/20 24/33 30/41 50/81 80/130 100/162 56/81 90/130 112/162 63/81 100/130 125/162 44/74 70/118 87/147 37/55 60/88 75/110 26/41 42/66 52/82 27/32 43/51 53/63 25/32 40/51 50/63 23/32 37/51 46/63 p.5 mm2 30 30 14 14 7 10 7 C13 1. k.k.5 mm2 30 30 18 18 7 13 7 The Lighting Handbook 1/20 W HI 1/35 W HI 2/35 W HI 1/70 W HI 2/70 W HI 1/100 W HI 1/150 W HI Depending on type of unit. = no p. 5 mm2 104 72 92 64 72 42 72 44 40 70 30 70 30 B10 1.5 mm2 37 30 40 26 30 19 30 19 16 30 13 30 13 B20 2.5 1.5 1.5 mm2 22 18 20 15 19 11 19 12 9 18 8 18 8 B13 1.5 2.5 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 1x14/21/28/35 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29 2x14/21/28/35 W T16 18 24 28 34 9 12 14 17 3/14 W T16 26 38 44 64 13 19 22 32 4/14 W T16 26 38 44 64 13 19 22 32 1/24 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29 2/24 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29 3/24 W T16 14 18 22 28 7 9 11 14 4/24 W T16 14 18 22 28 7 9 11 14 1/39 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29 2/39 W T16 18 28 30 36 9 14 15 18 1/49 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29 2/49 W T16 18 28 30 36 9 14 15 18 1/54 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29 2/54 W T16 14 20 24 30 7 10 12 15 1/80 W T16 18 28 30 36 9 14 15 22 2/80 W T16 8 14 16 20 4 7 8 10 Electronic ballasts for T26 fluorescent lamps.5 1.ATCO PC T8 PRO series) C10 1.Loading of automatic circuit breakers for electronic ballasts for fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps – Maximum recommended number of electronic ballasts per automatic circuit breaker Electronic ballasts for T16 fluorescent lamps.5 1.5 mm2 74 60 80 52 60 38 60 38 32 60 26 60 26 C20 2.5 mm2 62 50 60 40 52 30 52 32 24 50 22 50 22 C16 1.5 mm2 52 36 46 32 36 21 36 22 20 35 15 35 15 18 / Chapter 7 The Lighting Handbook 1/18 W 2/18 W 3/18 W 4/18 W 1/30 W 2/30 W 1/36 W 2/36 W 3/36 W 1/58 W 2/58 W 1/70 W 2/70 W T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 .5 1. non-dimming (TRIDONIC.5 mm2 44 36 40 30 40 22 38 24 18 36 16 36 16 C13 1.ATCO PC T5 PRO lp series) C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B20 1.5 2. non-dimming (TRIDONIC.5 mm2 31 25 30 20 26 15 26 16 12 25 11 25 11 B16 1. Electronic ballasts for T16 fluorescent lamps.5 mm2 180 92 42 38 150 64 92 52 86 32 180 52 86 32 52 26 52 26 28 22 B10 1.5 mm2 76 40 24 24 70 30 70 30 70 30 40 30 C20 2.5 mm2 80 46 30 28 76 30 76 30 76 30 46 30 B10 1.5 mm2 25 19 8 8 25 15 19 12 17 8 25 12 17 8 12 6 12 6 7 5 B13 1. dimmable (TRIDONIC.5 mm2 75 39 17 17 60 30 39 24 38 15 75 24 38 15 24 13 24 13 14 10 B20 2.5 mm2 80 54 26 24 80 40 54 34 50 22 80 34 50 22 34 18 34 18 20 14 C16 1.5 mm2 50 30 18 16 50 20 50 20 50 20 30 20 C16 1.5 mm2 50 38 16 16 50 30 38 24 34 16 50 24 34 16 24 12 24 12 14 10 C13 1.5 mm2 30 20 16 12 30 10 30 10 30 10 20 10 C13 1. dimmable (TRIDONIC.ATCO PCA T8 ECO/EXCEL one4all series) C10 1.ATCO PCA T5 ECO/EXCEL one4all (lp) series) C10 1.5 mm2 25 15 9 8 25 10 25 10 25 10 15 10 B16 1.5 mm2 40 23 15 14 38 15 38 15 38 15 23 15 The Lighting Handbook 1/18 W 2/18 W 3/18 W 4/18 W 1/30 W 2/30 W 1/36 W 2/36 W 1/38 W 2/38 W 1/58 W 2/58 W T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 T26 Chapter 7 / 19 .5 mm2 38 20 12 12 35 15 35 15 35 15 20 15 B20 2.5 mm2 40 27 13 12 40 20 27 17 25 11 40 17 25 11 17 9 17 9 10 7 B16 1.5 mm2 15 10 8 6 15 5 15 5 15 5 10 5 B13 1.5 mm2 90 46 21 19 75 32 46 26 43 16 90 26 43 16 26 13 26 13 14 11 1/14 W 2/14 W 3/14 W 4/14 W 1/21 W 2/21 W 1/28 W 2/28 W 1/35 W 2/35 W 1/24 W 2/24 W 1/39 W 2/39 W 1/49 W 2/49 W 1/54 W 2/54 W 1/80 W 2/80 W T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 T16 Electronic ballasts for T26 fluorescent lamps.5 mm2 150 78 34 34 120 60 78 48 76 30 150 48 70 30 48 26 48 26 28 20 C20 2. 5 mm2 10 16 30 10 30 10 20 10 10 C13 1.5 mm2 20 30 76 30 76 30 46 20 30 B10 1.5 mm2 20 16 20 16 27 17 27 12 19 7 B16 1.ATCO PCA TCL ECO/ EXCEL one4all series) C10 1.Electronic ballasts for TC-L fluorescent lamps.5 mm2 48 38 48 38 76 44 78 28 50 18 C20 2.5 mm2 6 10 25 10 25 10 15 7 10 B16 1.5 mm2 40 32 40 32 54 34 54 24 38 14 C16 1.5 mm2 15 12 15 12 19 12 19 7 14 4 B13 1.5 mm2 30 24 30 24 38 24 38 14 28 8 C13 1.5 mm2 12 20 50 20 50 20 30 14 20 C16 1.ATCO PC TCL PRO series) C10 1.5 mm2 24 19 24 19 38 22 39 14 25 9 B20 2.5 mm2 5 8 15 5 15 5 10 5 5 B13 1.5 mm2 16 24 70 30 70 30 40 18 30 C20 2.5 mm2 30 23 30 23 45 25 45 17 30 10 1/18 W 2/18 W 1/24 W 2/24 W 1/36 W 2/36 W 1/40 W 2/40 W 1/55 W 2/55 W TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L Electronic ballasts for TC-L compact fluorescent lamps.5 mm2 60 46 60 46 90 50 90 34 60 20 B10 1.5 mm2 10 15 38 15 38 15 23 10 15 2/18 W 2/24 W 1/36 W 2/36 W 1/40 W 2/40 W 1/55 W 2/55 W 1/80 W TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L TC-L 20 / Chapter 7 The Lighting Handbook .5 mm2 8 12 35 15 35 15 20 9 15 B20 2. non-dimmable (TRIDONIC. Basic dimming/Dali dimming (TRIDONIC. 5 mm2 48 32 46 32 48 32 46 32 48 48 34 22 34 22/14 34 14 C13 1.5 mm2 72 44 70 44 72 44 70 44 72 72 46 32 46 32/18 46 18 C16 1.5 mm2 40 32 40 32 38 34 38 28 29 14 29 14 13 1/11 W TC-SEL 2/11 W TC-SEL 1/13 W TC-DEL 2/13 W TC-DEL 1/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/32 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/32 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/42 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/42 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/57 W TC-TEL The Lighting Handbook Chapter 7 / 21 .5 mm2 mm2 80 80 60 64 80 80 60 64 70 76 46 68 70 76 46 56 50 58 24 28 50 58 24 28 22 26 B10 1.5 mm2 20 14 20 14 15 11 15 11 13 5 13 6 6 B13 1.5 mm2 mm2 40 60 28 40 40 60 28 40 30 50 22 32 30 50 22 32 26 38 10 18 26 38 12 18 12 16 C16 C20 1. nondimmable (TRIDONIC.ATCO PC PRO series) C10 1.5 1.Electronic ballasts for TC-DEL/TEL fluorescent lamps.ATCO PCA TCD/TCT ECO/EXCEL one4all series) C10 C13 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 mm2 40 30 40 30 35 23 35 23 25 12 25 12 11 B20 2. Basic dimming/Dali dimming (TRIDONIC.5 2 mm mm2 100 24 64 16 98 23 60 16 100 24 64 16 98 23 60 16 100 24 100 24 84 17 44 11 84 17 44/30 11/7 84 17 30 7 B13 B16 B20 1.5 mm2 80 54 78 52 80 54 78 52 80 80 74 38 74 38/22 74 22 C20 B10 2.5 2 2 mm mm mm2 36 40 50 22 27 32 35 39 49 22 26 30 36 40 50 22 27 32 35 39 49 22 26 30 36 40 50 36 40 50 23 37 42 16 19 22 23 37 42 16/9 19/11 22/15 23 37 42 9 11 15 1/9 W TC-SEL 2/9 W TC-SEL 1/10 W TC-DEL 2/10 W TC-DEL 1/11 W TC-SEL 2/11 W TC-SEL 1/13 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/13 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/32 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/32 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 1/42 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 2/42 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL Electronic ballasts for TC-DEL/TEL compact fluorescent lamps.5 mm2 30 20 30 20 25 15 25 16 19 9 19 9 8 B16 1. Loading of automatic circuit breakers for high-pressure lamps – Maximum recommended number of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker Conventional ballasts for metal halide lamps.. uncompensated Lamp values W A 50 0.53 70 0.77 70 1 100 1.5* 400 4. uncompensated Lamp values W A 35 0.98 150 1.8 125 1.4 A Conventional ballasts for high-pressure sodium vapour lamps. 4. uncompensated Lamp values W A 50 0..15 250 2.25 700 5.8 250 3 400 4..8 250 3 400 3.15 400 3.4 Number of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 9 14 18 22 6 10 13 7 11 14 17 5 8 10 6 9 11 14 4 6 8 4 6 7 9 2 4 5 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 B25 16 12 10 7 4 2 Conventional ballasts for high-pressure mercury vapour lamps. 3. ballast and lamp current of approx.6 80 0..2 150 1.4** Number of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 B25 11 18 23 29 9 15 18 23 7 11 14 17 5 8 9 12 4 6 7 9 2 4 5 6 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 1 2 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 2 * with OGLI 400 .5 A ** with OGLS 400 .4 Number of ballasts per automatic C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 10 15 18 23 8 6 9 11 14 6 4 7 7 9 4 2 3 3 4 2 1 2 2 2 1 – 1 1 1 – circuit breaker B16 B20 B25 13 16 20 10 12 15 7 9 10 3 4 5 2 3 3 1 1 1 22 / Chapter 7 The Lighting Handbook . ballast and lamp current of approx. 53 70 0.5* 400 4.8 125 1.8 250 3 400 4.5 A ** with OGLS 400 . ballast and lamp current of approx. 3.. compensated Lamp values W A 50 0.15 400 3..15 250 2.2 150 1.4 A Conventional ballasts for high-pressure sodium vapour lamps.. 4.8 250 3 400 3.77 70 1 100 1. compensated Lamp values W A 50 0.4** ComNumber of ballasts per automatic pensation C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 6 22 36 45 50 11 12 12 18 23 29 8 20 7 11 14 17 5 32 5 7 9 11 3 35 3 5 7 8 2 45 3 4 5 7 2 circuit breaker B16 18 13 8 5 4 3 B20 23 16 10 6 5 4 B25 27 20 12 8 6 5 * with OGLI 400 .Conventional ballasts for metal halide lamps. The Lighting Handbook Chapter 7 / 23 .6 80 0. compensated Lamp values W A 35 0. ballast and lamp current of approx..25 700 5.4 ComNumber of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker pensation C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 10 16 24 31 38 11 17 22 12 12 18 23 29 8 13 16 12 10 16 20 25 7 11 14 20 7 11 14 17 5 8 10 36 5 7 9 11 3 5 6 45 3 4 5 7 2 3 4 B25 27 20 17 12 8 5 Conventional ballasts for high-pressure mercury vapour lamps.4 ComNumber of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker pensation C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 B25 7 19 31 39 49 10 15 18 23 8 12 19 24 30 6 9 11 14 10 7 12 15 19 4 6 7 9 18 4 6 7 9 2 3 3 4 25 2 4 5 6 1 2 2 2 40 1 2 2 3 – 1 1 1 All data refer to a rated voltage of 230 V 50 Hz.98 150 1. = not recommended Magnetic transformers for QT/QR/QR-CB(C) halogen incandescent lamps (TRIDONIC.r.Loading of automatic circuit breakers for low-voltage halogen incandescent lamps – Maximum recommended number of transformers per automatic circuit breaker Magnetic transformers for QT/QR/QR-CB(C) halogen incandescent lamps (TRIDONIC.ATCO TMBx/OMTx series) Power 20 W 35 W 50 W 70 W 80 W 105 W 150 W 210 W 300 W C10 58 41 21 15 14 8 4 2–3 1–2 C16 93 65 35 24 22 13 6 4–5 2–3 B10 29 20 10 7 7 4 2 1 n. B16 46 32 17 12 11 6 3 2 1 n.r.r. 24 / Chapter 7 The Lighting Handbook .r.r. we recommend to use automatic circuit breakers with C characteristics. n.ATCO TMAx/TMDx series) Power 20 W 35 W 40 W 50 W 60 W 70 W 80 W 105 W C10 42 35 26 23 21 16 13 9 C16 67 56 43 37 33 26 21 14 B10 21 17 13 11 10 8 6 4 B16 33 28 21 18 16 13 10 7 Magnetic transformers for QT/QR/QR-CB(C) halogen incandescent lamps (TRIDONIC.ATCO OGT series) Power 250 W 300 W 500 W C10 3–4 2 1 C16 5–6 3–4 1–2 B10 1–2 1 n. B16 2–3 1–2 n. = not recommended Because of the high starting current of halogen incandescent lamps. 06 0. this can result in considerable voltage drops. Crosssections must be chosen so that the voltage drop across the conductor between transformer and lamp does not exceed 5 %.4 from 3.g.2 hours.3 to approx.Low-voltage installation Service life and luminous flux The service life and luminous flux of low-voltage halogen lamps are extremely voltage dependent. The Lighting Handbook Chapter 7 / 25 . this represents an 2 overvoltage of 8 % which re1 = duces the average 100% service life of the 0.08 0. e. If conductors are long and have small crosssections. Voltage changes on the line side are transferred to the secondary side in the same ratio.6 0.03 0. 3 however. For a 12 V halogen lamp. large currents flow on the secondary side.8 0.200 0. 1.7 0.4 0.5 0.3 0.8 0. 50 Multiplication factor for relative operating values 30 20 10 8 6 4 2 Lh 1= 100 % 0. 7 6 5 0.02 Lh 140 % = luminous flux Lh = service life Voltage as % of nominal voltage Operation at rated load Magnetic transformers should be operated at rated load as far as possible so as to avoid any rise in the secondary voltage which can result in a reduction in lamp service life (5 % overvoltage corresponds to 30 % shorter life).04 0.15 60 % 80 % 100 % 120 % A 1 V overvoltage is insignificant for a 230 W halogen 4 lamp.1 0.6 halogen lamp. Conductor cross-sections and voltage drop Because the voltages are small.000 hours 0. 0.2 0. Transformer Wherever possible.5 150 VA 2.5 4 6 6 up to 8 m 1. is approx. cables must be laid in a star configuration and be of equal length to ensure that all lamps receive the same voltage.5 4 200 VA 4 4 up to 6 m 1.5 2.5 1. therefore the transformer must be installed out of earshot if possible. however.Required conductor cross-sections in mm2 as a function of transformer rating and cable length (one-way line length) for magnetic transformers: Transformer rating Cable length in m up to 2 m up to 4 m 20 VA 1.5 2.5 1. 30 cm) in order to avoid the relatively large conductor cross-sections. especially when lighting is adjusted.5 2.5 1OO VA 1.5 4 6 6 10 10 10 16 Installation The distance between transformer and lamps must be as short as possible (minimum distance.5 50 VA 1.5 1. 26 / Chapter 7 The Lighting Handbook . On the other hand.5 1. there is often unwanted humming.5 4 6 10 up to 10 m up to 12 m 1. Transformers and light regulation Only approved safety transformers should be used. The ambient temperature must not exceed 50 °C max. . These are identified by the following symbol and details of the relevant distance in metres: …m The Lighting Handbook Chapter 7 / 27 . ).g. Phase control Halogen lamps are operated with a magnetic transformer. make sure there is adequate heat removal and that the safety distances from combustible materials are observed. Please note that transformers for use in areas which present fire risks must carry the appropriate conformity mark (e. Important: do not exceed maximum conductor length. Reverse phase control Halogen lamps are operated with an electronic transformer in the high-frequency range. In the case of recessed luminaires. Safety measures when operating low-voltage halogen lamps Low-voltage halogen lamps generate a huge amount of heat. . . The necessary safety distances from the illuminated surface also apply when using spotlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checklist according to the five steps of lighting design. Maintenance of lighting systems . . . . . Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table of burning hours . . . . . . . . . . . Table for room surface maintenance factor (RSMF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp lumens maintenance factor (LLMF) and lamp survival factor (LSF). . . . . . . . . . Economic efficiency calculation . . . . . . . . . . Table for luminaire maintenance factor (LMF) . . . Refurbishment of lighting systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental conditions . . . . Data collection sheet for lighting refurbishment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 8 Checklists The five steps of lighting design. . . . . . . . . . Economic analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 – 11 4 – 11 12 – 19 13 14 – 17 18 19 20 – 23 21 – 22 23 24 – 28 27 – 28 29 – 33 . . . . . . . . . The Lighting Handbook . in particular DSE workstations. Chapter 8 / 3 .The five steps of lighting design = help for structuring the lighting design scheme – Determine lighting REQUIREMENTS – SELECT lamps. the requirement criteria are taken into account. Analysis includes the assessment of lighting quality. ELI (Ergonomic Lighting Indicator) was developed in collaboration with ETH Zurich and TU Ilmenau (Prof. requirements are broken down as follows: – General conditions – Lighting quality requirements – visual performance – vista – visual comfort – vitality – empowerment The lighting quality criteria are in line with those set by the EU. Accordingly. The checklist below should help the user to consider key questions for clarifying basic requirements. The formulations for assessment differ from the requirements (ELI assessment). In the process. luminaires and lighting management – Calculate NUMBER of luminaires required – POSITION luminaires and lighting control – ANALYSE the results From experience we know that usually Step 1 = Determine lighting requirements is not taken into account sufficiently. Understanding this task will allow for proper development of a well thought-out lighting solution based on the quality characteristics of lighting (Chapter 1) and project-specific requirements. The Lighting Handbook A checklist for workplace analysis (page 11) is provided for easy identification of technical lighting equipment at workplaces. Schierz). Dr. .. Consideration of the traditional quality characteristics of lighting has a major impact on visual task performance.. no extraordinary changes of viewing direction occur.Checklist according to the five steps of lighting design 1. Checked ✓ At the workstations. circulation areas Multi-task areas Arrangement and material of furniture Protection types (foreign bodies and humidity) Protection classes (electrical installations) Influence by chemicals Fire protection Emergency lighting Energy consumption limits (kWh/year) Maximum power requirement (W/m²) Budget for initial installation Lighting quality requirements (ELI requirements) Criterion A – Visual performance How well should the visual task be recognised? Explanation: Lighting in conformity with relevant standards is decisive for ensuring that the visual task can be identified and the related activities can be carried out. … .. Lighting requirements General conditions Utilization of room Size and height of room Ceiling structure Reflection factors Window areas Doors... visual tasks are the same across the whole area... colour distinction is required to a common extent. . . standard visual tasks have to be performed. 4 / Chapter 8 -2 -1 0* 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 The Lighting Handbook . passageways. . .. In the project planned. .. it will be particularly important to identify three-dimensional structures in the room.. the lighting concept should be properly geared towards expectations.. In the project planned... the first visual impression will be decisive.. . .. * Minimum criterion. .. users must be particularly protected from annoying sources of glare.. .Within the visual task area... ..... the perceptible quality of the luminaire will be of major importance. . the room should provide a bright and inviting impression. light is not only needed for seeing but also enhances the looks of the interior.. . In the project planned.. corresponds to values specified in the standards -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 Mean value Visual task Criterion B – Vista How do you want to experience the lighting solution in your environment? Explanation: In prestigious buildings.... . . -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 Chapter 8 / 5 . reflections must be avoided. the cleanliness of the room and the lighting will be of major importance. Rooms should be illuminated with uniform brightness and lighting balance. for example. but also for perception in the room. . ... the lighting concept should facilitate orientation in the room. … .. 1 = does not apply at all.. the lighting concept should blend in smoothly with the interior design. 5 = applies completely 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Mean value Vista Criterion C – Visual comfort How much visual comfort is required in the room? Explanation: Light is needed not only in the visual task area. the field of vision should be free from sources of glare.. hard shadows must be avoided.. Light can provide guidance and create a favourable first visual impression of a room... The Lighting Handbook -2 -1 0 * 1 2 .. .. The lighting should be switched automatically. . there must be no flickering light.. .. .. . visual tasks or periods of use call for options to individually influence one’s lighting situation. special emphasis is put on protection against sources of annoyance or adverse health effects.. . it has a positive impact on their health and may even enhance or influence biological processes. Sensors and control systems help users adjust the lighting situation to their personal needs.. daylight must be taken into account. The lighting concept… .. In the project planned. a variety of tasks must be taken into account. 1 = does not apply at all. In the project planned.. Moreover. the room should be illuminated uniformly. ... should make people feel good.. In the area around the visual task. * Minimum criterion. larger dark areas should be avoided. 5 = applies completely 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Mean value Vitality Criterion E – Empowerment To what extent should the lighting adjust to my personal requirements? Explanation: Varying visual requirements.... it should be possible in particular to adjust the lighting to the brightness level required. .... ... In the project planned. the effect to be created should be as natural as possible. people’s circadian rhythm should be particularly taken into account. The artificial lighting should be controlled by daylight sensors. corresponds to values specified in the standards -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 Mean value Visual comfort Criterion D – Vitality How positive should the light’s influence be on people? Explanation: Light significantly influences people’s activity and sense of well-being. should stimulate people.. the user should be able to personally influence the lighting situation.... ... 6 / Chapter 8 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 The Lighting Handbook 1 2 3 4 5 . The lighting should be controlled on the basis of time. Any future layout changes should be taken into account. 1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Mean value Empowerment ELI – LENI requirements Application: the mean values of the individual criteria are entered on the centre lines of the spider chart. Visual performance A 2 1 0 5 E Empowerment 4 3 -1 2 1 -2 1 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 2 3 4 5B Vista 3 4 5 D Vitality C Visual comfort ELI 60 120 0 kWh/m a 2 180 LENI Calculation see Chapter 1 / 19 The Lighting Handbook Chapter 8 / 7 2. Selection of lamps, luminaires and lighting management Lamp type Luminaire range and model Lighting management range and modules 3. Calculate number of luminaires required Rough calculation (Quickplan/Quickcalc) Detailed calculation (Dialux/Relux) Planning conditions (maintenance, reflection) 4. Positioning of luminaires and lighting control Positioning the luminaires – structural situation – orientation (avoid reflections and glare) – spacings between luminaires (regular patterns) – peripheries – alignment techn. infrastructure (distribution cabinet, clamping compartment, …) Position of control gear Emergency lighting 5. Analysis of results Lighting quality analysis (ELI assessment) Criterion A – Visual performance How well can the visual task be recognised? Checked ✓ Explanation: Lighting in conformity with relevant standards is decisive for ensuring that the visual task can be identified and the related activities can be carried out. Consideration of the traditional quality characteristics of lighting has a major impact on visual task performance. In the main visual task area, the lighting … ... provides uniformity of illuminance. ... complies with the colour rendition index. 8 / Chapter 8 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 The Lighting Handbook ... complies with the maintenance value of illuminance. -2 -1 0 * 1 2 In the area around the visual task, the illuminance level required is achieved. In the lighting installation as it exists at present, … ... annoying hard shadows, ... irritating direct glare ... and annoying reflections are avoided. * Minimum criterion, corresponds to values specified in the standards -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 Mean value Visual task Please note: EN 12464 specifies standard values; values may be lower only if visual tasks are modified. Where there are several task areas, calculate and assess the mean value for all of them. Criterion B – Vista How do you experience the lighting solution in your environment? Explanation: In prestigious buildings, for example, light is not only needed for seeing but also enhances the looks of the interior. Light can provide guidance and create a favourable first visual impression of a room. The lighting concept … ... enhances interior design features. ... fulfils my personal expectations. ... takes passageways, circulation areas and activity zones into consideration. ... creates a hierarchy of perception (lighting focuses). The luminaires make a high-quality impression. The luminaires are neither soiled nor affected by other foreign substances. 1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Mean value Vista Criterion C – Visual comfort How much visual comfort is provided in the room? Explanation: Light is needed not only in the visual task area, but also for perception in the room. Rooms should be illuminated with uniform brightness and lighting balance. -2 -1 0 * 1 2 The lighting solution produces no glare (UGR). The Lighting Handbook The lighting components are balanced and matched to the room. The ceiling and walls are pleasantly bright. -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 Chapter 8 / 9 The lighting solution … ... takes daylight into account and uses it. ... does not flicker. ... does not allow major dark areas in the room. The task area environment is uniformly illuminated. * Minimum criterion, corresponds to values specified in the standards -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 Mean value Visual comfort Criterion D – Vitality How positive is the light’s influence on the people? Explanation: Light significantly influences people’s activity and sense of well-being. Moreover, it has a positive impact on their health and may even enhance or influence biological processes. The lighting … ... is one of the factors that make me feel good. ... has a stimulating effect. ... adjusts to the brightness level required. The lighting creates a natural, pleasant effect. The lighting stabilises/enhances the users’ circadian rhythm. There are no sources of annoyance or adverse health effects. 1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Mean value Vitality Criterion E – Empowerment To what extent does the lighting adjust to my personal requirements? Explanation: Varying visual requirements, visual tasks or periods of use call for options to individually influence one’s lighting situation. Sensors and control systems help users adjust the lighting situation to their personal needs. 1 2 3 4 5 The installation can be switched or dimmed. A variety of lighting scenes can be called up. 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Presence detectors make sure that the lighting switches automatically. Thanks to daylight sensors, the artificial lighting adjusts to daylight changes over the course of the day. Automated, dynamic scenes are available. 10 / Chapter 8 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 The Lighting Handbook Luminaires and switches can be rearranged flexibly. The luminaires are arranged so as to allow for flexible change in room utilisation without major effort. 1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Mean value Empowerment ELI – LENI assessments Application: the mean values of the individual criteria are entered on the centre lines of the spider chart. Visual performance A 2 1 0 5 E Empowerment 4 3 -1 2 1 -2 1 1 2 -2 -1 0 1 2 2 3 4 5B Vista 3 4 5 D Vitality C Visual comfort ELI 60 120 0 kWh/m2 a 180 LENI Calculation see Chapter 1 / 19 Other analyses Situation regarding standards Economic efficiency The Lighting Handbook Budget Documentation Methods of presentation Chapter 8 / 11 Maintenance of lighting systems Today, the maintenance of lighting installations is a decisive factor in an installation’s balance of costs. According to the formula below (1), a lighting level required of Em = 500 lx at a standard maintenance factor of MF = 0.67 implies a new illuminance level of Enew = 750 lx. Em: maintained illuminance = maintenance value of illuminance (1) Em = Enew x MF (maintenance factor) Benefit of a high MF: – lower luminaire investment costs – reduced energy costs Benefit of a low MF: – low maintenance costs – longer maintenance intervals Please note: at a lower maintenance factor, illuminance may be constantly dimmed to the maintenance value to save energy (maintenance control). The maintenance factor includes 4 components: (2) MF = LLMF x LSF x LMF x RMF All these factors describe the decrease in illuminance. The maximum in each case is 1, corresponding to the new value. At the respective time of maintenance, the various causes of the decrease in illuminance must be identified. Maintenance factor components Causes of illuminance decrease Lamp luminous flux mainten. factor LLMF Lamp survival factor LSF Luminaire maintenance factor LMF Room maintenance factor RMF Ageing of lamps Failure of lamps Soiling of luminaire Soiling of room 12 / Chapter 8 The Lighting Handbook ➝ Options for improving the maintenance factor: – Lamp replacement already before the lamp service life ends (LLWF/LSF ) – Immediate replacement of lamps in case of failure (LSF = 1) – Use of closed luminaires (LWF7 ) – More frequent room cleaning (RWF7 ) ➝ ➝ 5 Environmental conditions In case you are not familiar with the application. the tables below will help you calculate the accurate maintenance factor according to formula (2).50 The Lighting Handbook According to CIE – volume 97. warehouses.0 1.160 % 140 % 120 % 100 % 80 % 60 % 40 % 20 % 0. at 2005 Chapter 8 / 13 . Ambient condition Very Clean Maintenance Working interval areas recommended Clean-rooms. wood processing Reference maintenance factor 0. however.5 3. data 3 years centres. assembly workstations for electronic components 3 years 2 years Offices. the following standard values apply.0 Example: Luminaire maintenance: every year Room surface maintenance: every 3 years Lamp replacement: every 3 years Faulty lamp replacement: immediately = Enew = Em 3. restaurants. chemical plants.80 Clean Normal 0. foundries.0 0.57 Soiled 1 year 0. assembly bays Steel works.0 years 2. laboratories. grinding shops.67 0. schools Shops. “Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems”. welding shops.5 1.5 2. 000 1.96 0.89 1.00 1.98 0.000 14.96 0.90 0.00 1. ball.00 1.93 1.90 0. lamp.00 1.95 0.82 0.00 1.95 0.98 0.50 1.93 0.78 0.00 0.99 0.000 20.00 1.000 40.96 0.97 0.99 0.00 1.00 1.94 0.00 1.94 0.00 1.97 0.00 0.00 0.95 0.50 1.96 0.78 0.94 0.90 0.60 1.90 0.91 0.99 0.96 0.90 0.92 0.00 1.91 0. lamp.98 0.50 1.94 0.97 0.92 0.99 0.98 0.89 0.60 1.00 1.90 0.98 0.99 0.000 35.Lamp lumens maintenance factor (LLMF) 14 / Chapter 8 Lamps Incandescent lamp CIE97:2005 Halogen incandescent lamp CIE97:2005 T26 (low-loss ballast) single-band fluorescent lamp ZVEI 2005 T26 (low-loss ballast) triple-band fluorescent lamp ZVEI 2005 T26 (electronic ballast) triple-band fluor.000 22.00 1.88 1.99 0.90 1.00 1.92 0.93 0.000 4.00 0.) triple-band fluor.99 0.99 0.000 6.000 8.) triple-band fluor.98 0.76 0.91 0.98 0.00 0.92 0.91 0.99 0.99 0.00 1. ball.90 0.97 0.00 1.00 1.89 0.00 1.90 0.78 0.00 0.00 1.00 1.98 0.00 1.90 0.99 0.00 1.00 1.73 0.90 0.91 0.00 1.98 0.94 0.00 1.97 0.98 0.000 16.00 1.88 0. lamp ZVEI 2005/CIE97:2005 T26 (el.95 0.00 1.98 0.00 0.99 0.92 0.000 1.99 1.92 0.00 0.94 0.90 0.99 0.00 1.00 0.500 2.95 0.00 0.75 0.000 18.99 0.99 0.72 1.97 0.94 0.99 0. long-life Philips MASTER TL-D Xtreme (long life) T26 (el.99 0.00 1.97 0.91 0.90 1.90 0.) triple-band fluor.99 0.90 0. long-life AURA SUPREME T5 HO LL (long life) LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF Burning hours 100 500 1.99 0.00 1.91 1.94 0.00 1.000 45.93 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.94 0.97 0.98 The Lighting Handbook .99 0.00 1.98 0.00 1.91 0.92 0.00 1.98 0.99 0.00 1.98 0.00 0.93 0.00 1.91 1.70 1.80 0.000 30.00 1.97 0.98 0.90 0.00 1.000 24.98 0.95 0.00 0.00 1.93 0.000 12.95 0.00 1.98 0.94 0.94 0.99 0.95 1.83 0.00 0.99 0.50 1.00 1.95 0.00 1.95 0.90 0.98 0.00 1.96 0.00 1.00 1.96 0.99 0. long-life AURA Ultimate LL (long life) T16 (electronic ballast) triple-band fluorescent lamp ZVEI 2005 T16 (el.99 0.95 0.00 1.91 0.93 0.97 0.00 0.97 0.96 0.97 0.99 0.99 0. ball.00 0.98 0.89 0.000 10.99 0.00 1.00 1.98 0.92 0.98 0.00 1.00 0.93 0.88 0.00 1. lamp.00 1.97 0.93 0.92 0.93 0.97 0.00 1. 97 0.91 0.75 0.99 0.77 0.93 0.90 0.94 0.00 0.98 0.00 0. lamp ZVEI 2005 TC-DEL 10-26W (electronic ballast) Compact fluor. lamp ZVEI 2005 TC-SEL. TC-TEL 5-42W (electronic ballast) Compact fluor.87 0.98 0.97 0. to IEC (2.90 0.79 1.50 1.85 0.96 0.98 0.98 0.95 0.00 1.81 0.00 1.60 1.78 1.82 0.00 1.94 0.62 1.98 0.00 0.00 1.75 h ON.84 0.79 0.99 0. to specifications by lamp manufacturers.98 0.92 0.98 0.93 0. acc.00 1.00 0. January 2008.78 1.83 0.80 0.89 0.The Lighting Handbook and lamp survival factor (LSF) Compact fluorescent lamp CIE97:2005 TC-S.25 h OFF).50 1.90 0.95 0. lamp ZVEI 2005 TC-L 18-80W (electronic ballast) Compact fluor.87 0.87 0.90 0.86 0.95 0.84 0.99 0.00 1.81 0.88 0.89 1.85 0. lamp ZVEI 2005 Induction lamp Philips QL LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF 1.98 0.91 0.99 0.88 1.98 0.00 1.88 0.85 1.99 0.94 0.80 0.79 0.93 0.89 0.76 0.93 0.80 0.99 0.89 0.91 0.87 0. TC-D.97 0.98 0.00 0. lamp ZVEI 2005 TC-L 18-36W (low-loss ballast) Compact fluor.00 1. Most data are based on the standardised 3-hour switching rhythm acc.00 0.00 1.00 1.00 0.00 0.97 0.60 1.90 0.96 0.98 0.99 0.96 0.99 0.00 1.99 0.96 0.99 0.97 0.97 0.55 1.82 0.97 0. and ZVEI publication “Service life behaviour of discharge lamps for lighting” of November 2005.97 0.00 1.75 1.92 0.98 0.97 0.92 0.94 0.00 1.00 1.00 1.90 0.83 0.00 1.99 0.99 0.00 1.99 0.00 0.94 Chapter 8 / 15 Values acc. to CIE97:2005 Technical report “Guide on the Maintenance of Indoor Electric Lighting Systems” 2nd edition.86 0. The use of state-of-the-art ballast technology is a prerequisite.00 0.99 0.00 1.00 0.00 0.98 0.96 0.94 0.00 1.00 1.83 0.00 1. The switching frequency has a major influence on lamp survival.98 0.86 0.99 0.98 0.86 0.97 0.00 0.00 1. .98 0.97 0. TC-T 5-26W (low-loss ballast) Compact fluor.00 1.00 0.90 0.99 0.80 0. 0.96 0.99 0.86 0.00 1.94 0.98 0.95 0.97 0. For data of lamps by other manufacturers or other lamp types.88 0. please contact the respective manufacturer directly. 99 0.98 0.90 0.91 0.00 0.50 0.000 6.93 0.50 1.00 0.00 0.86 0.98 0.98 0.69 1.56 0.81 0.00 1.99 0.88 0.80 0.80 0.77 0.61 1.69 1.84 0.92 0.70 1.79 0.80 0.00 1.75 1.93 0.00 0.00 0.63 0.75 0.000 1.98 0.59 0.80 0.79 0.73 0.88 0.99 0.00 1.68 0.77 0.90 0.000 40.78 0.00 1.60 0.86 0.97 0.98 0.90 0.87 0.75 0.000 1.000 18.80 1.81 0.93 0.00 0.99 0.96 0.84 0.88 0.98 0.95 0.61 1.97 0.74 0.72 0.91 0.00 1.83 0.88 0.79 0.63 0.99 0.50 1.83 0.95 0.69 1.000 30.70 0.68 0.00 1.000 22.00 0.97 0.74 0.62 1.000 20.95 0.92 0.87 0.80 0.65 0.98 0.000 4.70 0.99 0.98 0.55 0.96 0.85 0.98 0.53 0.98 0.00 0.91 0.75 0.91 0.70 0.00 1.000 45.97 0.95 0.99 0.87 0.92 0.66 0.86 0.72 0.99 0.99 0.00 0.00 0.73 0.00 1.61 1.71 0.95 0.99 0.00 0.98 0.86 0.80 0.87 0.70 0.92 0.000 16.64 0.83 0.500 2.98 0.71 0.00 1.73 0.00 1.99 0.86 0.60 0.97 0.97 0.00 0.76 0.95 0.92 0.98 0.80 0.65 1.Lamp lumens maintenance factor (LLMF) 16 / Chapter 8 Lamps Metal halide lamp Ceramic (50-150W) CIE97:2005 Metal halide lamp Ceramic Philips CDM-T 70W/Elite Metal halide lamp Ceramic Osram HCI-T 150W/WDL PB Metal halide lamp Ceramic Osram HCI 250W PB Metal halide lamp Quartz (250/400W) CIE97:2005 Metal halide lamp Quartz Osram HQI-E 250W/D Metal halide lamp Quartz Osram HQI-E 400W/D Metal halide lamp Quartz Osram HQI-BT 400W/N Metal halide lamp Quartz Philips HPI-T Plus 250/400W LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF Burning hours 100 500 1.69 0.99 0.99 0.96 0.87 0.90 0.70 0.93 0.000 24.000 10.98 0.000 35.78 0.000 8.50 The Lighting Handbook .99 0.98 0.87 0.97 0.72 0.00 0.00 0.73 0.96 0.000 14.000 12.98 0.00 0.85 0.85 0.79 0.56 1.99 0.91 0.00 0.50 1.95 0.85 0.00 0.94 0.86 0.71 1.89 0.75 0.96 0. 93 0.97 0.99 0.86 0.97 0. and ZVEI publication “Service life behaviour of discharge lamps for lighting” of November 2005.87 and lamp survival factor (LSF) High-pressure mercury-vapour lamp 50–1.93 0.00 0.94 0.83 0.86 0.00 0.93 0.97 0.93 0.98 0.96 0.71 0.88 0.00 0.97 0.91 0.00 1.90 0.99 0.90 0.88 0.99 0.97 0.55 0.98 0.75 1.88 0.79 0.00 0.97 0.72 0.25 h OFF).00 0.77 0.83 0.00 1.98 0.87 0.87 0.96 0.77 0.87 0.90 0.63 0. January 2008.93 0.79 0. acc.98 0.93 0.97 0.93 0.97 0.93 0.97 0.95 0.98 0.98 0.95 0.99 0.90 LSF 1.97 0.90 0.63 0.95 0.87 0.91 0. 0.92 0.99 0.94 0.97 0.89 0.00 1.98 0.00 1.The Lighting Handbook LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF LSF LLMF 1.98 0.88 0.000W ZVEI 2005 Mercury vapour lamp Philips HPL-N 50-400W Sodium vapour lamp 50/70W ZVEI 2005 Sodium vapour lamp 150–400W (standard luminous flux) ZVEI 2005 Sodium vapour lamp 150–400W (higher luminous flux) ZVEI 2005 Sodium vapour lamp Philips SON(-T) PIA Plus 100–400W LSF 1.84 0.92 0.92 0.87 0.99 0.95 0.98 0.94 0. The switching frequency has a major influence on lamp survival.96 0.96 0.98 0.81 0.97 0.85 1.98 0.00 0.82 0.88 0.96 0.99 0.84 0.70 1.75 h ON.00 0.88 0.88 0.84 0.99 0.92 0.97 0.00 1. The use of state-of-the-art ballast technology is a prerequisite.99 0.00 1.70 LLMF 1.91 0.92 0.96 0.89 0.90 0. to IEC (2.00 1. please contact the respective manufacturer directly.94 0.00 0.99 0.92 0.81 0.97 0.92 0.99 0.96 0.88 0.80 0.98 0.92 0.00 0.91 0.87 0.00 0.72 0. to specifications by lamp manufacturers.89 0.93 0.94 0.00 0.72 0.95 0.96 0.99 0.98 0.50 1.77 0.99 0.00 1.77 0. .00 1.73 LLMF 1.90 0.92 0.43 Chapter 8 / 17 Values acc.98 0.79 0.96 0. Most data are based on the standardised 3-hour switching rhythm acc.73 0.91 0.98 0.99 0.93 0.75 0.50 1.91 0. to CIE97:2005 Technical report “Guide on the Maintenance of Indoor Electric Lighting Systems” 2nd edition.50 1.96 0.00 1.89 LSF 1.99 0.88 0.86 0.98 0.00 0.00 1. For data of lamps by other manufacturers or other lamp types.90 0. 96 0.85 0.78 0.95 0.91 0.90 0.64 0.91 0.52 Enclosed IP2X 0.80 0.76 0.87 0. S = clean (sauber).90 0.77 0.86 0.92 0.5 SS S N V SS 1.92 0.94 0.89 0.92 0.85 0.73 0.51 0.90 0.60 0.79 0.88 0.68 Reflector enclosed above (no self-cleaning effect) 0.45 From CIE publication 97 “Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems”.84 0.87 0.71 0.85 0.70 0.84 0.Table for luminaire maintenance factor (LMF) 18 / Chapter 8 2.83 0.79 0.55 0.89 0.75 0.71 0.82 0.89 0.74 0.88 0.94 0.93 0.65 0.73 0. dated 2005.86 0.96 0.95 0.79 0.82 0.92 0.57 0.91 0.72 0.54 0.5 V SS S N 3.93 0.83 0.87 0.86 0.5 S N Luminaire cleaning interval in years Environment type Luminaire type Bare batten luminaires 0.92 0.94 0.80 0.88 0.81 0.69 0.96 0.91 0.91 0.82 0.92 0.91 0.73 Reflector exposed above (self-cleaning effect) 0.89 0.81 0.81 0.74 0.0 S N 0.84 0.73 0.81 0.83 0.0 V SS S N V SS V 2.86 0.66 0.92 0.59 0.81 0.90 0.77 0.95 0.64 0.80 0.77 0.83 0.74 0.93 0.91 0.85 0.94 0.75 0.0 S N V SS 1.93 0.88 0.89 0.94 0.93 0.85 0.95 0.96 0.98 0.93 0.93 0.92 0.86 0.83 0.87 0.65 Dust-proof IP5X 0.68 0.74 0.80 0.77 0.89 0. ISBN 3 900 734 34 8 Ambient conditions: SS = very clean (sehr sauber).79 Indirect luminaires 0.87 0.75 0.73 0.89 0.93 0.84 0.83 0.94 0.61 0.95 0.79 0.94 0. V = soiled (verschmutzt) The Lighting Handbook .88 0.83 0.94 0.91 0.90 0.79 0. N = normal.92 0.89 0. 90 0.89 0.75 0. V = soiled (verschmutzt) 0.97 0.72 0.92 0.84 0.72 0.The Lighting Handbook 5. ISBN 3 900 734 34 8 The figures in the table above apply to reflection factors 70/50/20 and a medium-sized room (k = 2.5) Ambient conditions: SS = very clean (sehr sauber).93 0.83 V 1.94 0.72 0.92 0.55 0.55 0.95 0.84 0.60 0.75 0.55 0.92 0.94 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.84 0.92 0.92 0.55 0.86 0.91 0.5 Illumina.95 0.90 0.92 0. dated 2005.95 0.91 0.94 0.55 0.92 0.95 0.75 0.00 0.84 N 1.86 0.97 0.86 0.5 6.87 0.83 0.00 0.55 0.0 4.72 0.0 5.91 0.00 0.96 0.5 1.97 0.75 0.00 0.86 0.95 Indirect S 1.90 0.94 0.90 V 1.95 0.00 0.00 0.84 0.91 0.00 0.85 0.75 0.00 0.55 0.5 3.84 0.96 0.91 0.73 0.75 Indirect SS 1.86 Direct/ SS 1.97 S 1.83 0.97 0.97 0.91 0.86 0.0 1.95 0.87 0.75 0.97 0.55 Chapter 8 / 19 .95 0.75 0.75 0.97 0.00 0.55 0.97 0.Environment tion type type Direct SS 1.0 3.95 0.90 0.98 0.72 V 1.90 0.90 0.86 0.86 0.85 0.77 0.97 0.91 0.90 0.83 0.91 0.86 0.94 0.84 0.90 0.83 0.95 0.92 0.75 0.86 0.77 0.83 0.72 0.5 4.83 0.91 0.83 0.5 2.72 0.91 N 1.92 0.72 0.86 0.00 0.86 0.84 0.95 0.94 0. S = clean (sauber).72 0.91 0.83 0.84 0.00 0.90 0.94 N 1.72 0. N = normal.55 From CIE publication 97 “Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems”.92 S 1.84 0.0 2.0 Table for room surface maintenance factor (RSMF) Room cleaning interval in years 0 0.92 0.91 0.97 0.93 0.00 0.56 0.97 0.75 0.94 0. Economic efficiency calculation A short pay-back period is usually the most important consideration when designing lighting systems. (5) Annual burning hours Total of the daily lamp ON hours over the year. see Chap. (16) Cost of room cleaning Labour costs for cleaning room surfaces and restoring the reflection characteristics to their new condition.67 can be assumed (3-year maintenance interval. The pay-back period calculation using the following forms is based on a static calculation method. (14) Cost of lamp replacement Cost of the complete job of replacing the lamps. (9) Maintenance factor A reference maintenance factor of 0. clean environment). The lighting calculation cannot be made until the maintenance factor has been determined. office. Dynamic calculation models involving depreciation and interest payments are left to the financial experts and fall outside the scope of this handbook. 8/25) provides help for daylight-based systems. Include energy standing charges in the working price. (17) Energy costs per kWh Estimate a mixed price for high and low tariff. Static calculation model Pay-back time = Extra expenditure investment costs Annual saving in operating costs 20 / Chapter 8 The Lighting Handbook Definition of terms used in the economic analysis sheets (3) System power of luminaire Lamp wattage + power dissipation in control gear. (15) Cost of luminaire cleaning Cost of the complete job of cleaning the luminaire plus replacing faulty components in the lighting system including parts costs. The table of burning hours (Chap. 8/15). . including the costs of the lamp and additional costs such as step ladders.g. The maintenance value can be determined precisely on the basis of the details included in the previous chapter “Maintenance of lighting installations”. e. This is a theoretical approach that delivers a guide value very quickly and is perfectly adequate for an initial estimate. weekend overtime payments or loss of production. The maintenance factor plus the general conditions have to be documented in the design process. 8/25 Lamp replacement interval (y) Luminaire cleaning interval (y) Room cleaning interval (y) Number of luminaires Maintenance factor Number of luminaires Itemised investment costs Cost of one luminaire Cost of one lamp The Lighting Handbook (11) (12) (13) (9) (10) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (2) (3) (1) Option 2 Installation costs per luminaire Chapter 8 / 21 .Economic analysis Building project Option 1 Luminaire type Luminaire data Number of lamps per luminaire System power of luminaire (W) Operating data Service life of system (y) Annual burning hours see Chap. Option 1 Itemised operating costs Cost of lamp replacement Cost of luminaire cleaning Cost of room cleaning Energy costs per kWh Investment costs Luminaire costs (10) x (11) Lamp costs (10) x (2) x (12) Installation costs (10) x (13) Investment costs (18) + (19) + (20) Operating costs Lamp replacement costs (14) x (4) Luminaire cleaning costs (15) x (4) Room cleaning costs (16) x (4) Energy costs (10) x (3) x (4) x (5) x (17) (7) (6) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (18) (19) (20) (21) (14) (15) (16) (17) Option 2 (8) 1000 Operating costs (22) + (23) + (24) + (25) Annual operating costs (26) (4) Pay-back period* = (21) Option 2 – (21) Option 1 (27) Option 1 – (27) Option 2 – – = years Pay-back period* = * excludes depreciation and interest = years The Lighting Handbook 22 / Chapter 8 . From CIE publication 97 “Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems”.100 1. 5 days/week 258 258 10 10 No Yes Daylight-based control: the lamps switch on automatically when there is too little daylight available. 6 days/week 310 310 10 10 No Yes Single shift. dated 2005 Chapter 8 / 23 .The Lighting Handbook Working mode/shift type Daylight-based control 24-h shift working.300 Double shift. 6 days/week 310 310 16 16 No Yes Table of burning hours Single shift. Process monitoring/control 4. Data is based on the assumption that there is sufficient available daylight for half the year.580 1.760 7.550 On period Days in use/year 365 365 Hours/day 24 24 No Yes Burning hours per lamp and year in hours 8.760 2.960 3.720 3. 2. they will complement each other without the levels adding up. In a project. 5. 4. CO2 and costs Pros 1. 1.g. Advanced materials Today’s reflectors and innovative surface finishes provide for more efficient luminaires (e. Use of daylight The Luxmate daylight-based lighting control system provides for high energy savings where sufficient daylight is available. Saving energy. optimised temperatures and improvements of the lamps’ physical properties provide for extensive savings. If several measures are taken. Taking room utilisation into account Using presence detectors or a time-based control system. Improvement of lamps and control gear Innovations in the electronic control of lamps. The savings apply only on a case-by-case basis. 3. Taking ageing into account The balance between the new value and minimum illuminance can be saved by dimmable control (Maintenance Control). viable savings must be accurately calculated in the design stage. 15 years ago.Refurbishment of lighting systems The following list provides clues for discussion with the customer. The potentialities stated draw a comparison between contemporary lighting solution options available today with the technology approx. Potential savings up to –30 % up to –60 % up to –40 % up to –17 % up to –25 % 24 / Chapter 8 The Lighting Handbook . the lighting can be adjusted more properly to the time/s of use. PSP+). people’s error rate can be minimised by an upgraded lighting solution (e. ETH Zürich). allowing to perfectly adjust the lighting to the individual (e.g. research by TU Ilmenau.g. Potential savings Please note: It is difficult to provide exact and generally applicable figures. people’s productivity can be significantly improved by an upgraded lighting solution (e. doctoral thesis by Susanne Fleischer. Light Right Consortium). 3. AIF no. 4.2. research by TU Ilmenau. Fewer errors According to various studies. Improved ergonomic compatibility Pros 1. The Lighting Handbook Chapter 8 / 25 ➝ ➝ ➝ ➝ . 9955). measurable increases were achieved in individual cases. Increased productivity According to various studies. AIF no. Enhanced sense of well-being Pleasant brightness levels and personal control can have a positive impact on people’s sense of well-being (e. 2.g.g. Minor increases already result in high economic benefits. however. 9955). Increased alertness The human physiology is decoded step by step. Improvements in environmental factors Today. 26 / Chapter 8 . Energy savings up to –20 % Easy cleaning of luminaires. Additional pros Pros 1. Reduction in maintenance costs up to –30 % Contemporary luminaires frequently come in a closed design. AURA Ultimate LL). TECTON I IP). Environmental impact has been reduced (e. facility management tools allow for automatic. Potential savings up to +50 % Collecting data for lighting refurbishment The Lighting Handbook The following forms are intended to help you collect all relevant data required for evaluating the situation in terms of existing lighting installations.g. They provide the basis for comparing technical lighting features and for calculating costs.3. 4. Automatic monitoring of installations up to –80 % Today. Philips Master TL-D Xtreme. WEEE and RoHS provide the basis for manufacturing luminaires.g.g.g. 4. LIGHTFIELDS. lead/cadmium). 3. Improved maintenance conditions (employment of staff for cleaning. PERLUCE). 2. maintenance and monitoring) Pros 1. and thus energy savings (e. the service life of lamps has been significantly extended (e. and extension of the maintenance cycle result in a reduced number of luminaires required. Extension of maintenance cycle Over recent years. State of the art The latest lighting solutions reflect the state of the art and an improved situation in terms of lighting standards. 2. in emergency lighting/ONLITE).g. MELLOW LIGHT IV. allowing for easy cleaning (e. central monitoring of installations (e. Data collection sheet for lighting refurbishment Project Address Activities in room Contact Tel Fax Old system Option 1 Luminaire type A Number of luminaires Number of lamps per luminaire Type of ballast System power per luminaire including ballast (W) Illuminance Option 2 Luminaire type B Number of luminaires Number of lamps per luminaire Type of ballast System power per luminaire including ballast (W) Illuminance Total installed load in kW ON period each day (h) Working days per year Annual ON period (h) Power consumption in kWh/a Annual savings in kWh Basic power price kW/year The Lighting Handbook Power costs per kWh Annual power costs in kWh Annual savings Chapter 8 / 27 . Room length Room width Room height Uniformity Emean = Emin = lx lx Reflection: wall ceiling floor u = Emin = Emean % % % Room sketch: Cleaning per luminaire/year Lamp replacement (incl. lamp) 28 / Chapter 8 The Lighting Handbook Costs Old system Option 1 Option 2 . The Lighting Handbook 1. Fundamental analysis in luminaires with electronic ballast or dimmable electronic ballast: Note Checked ✓ Error occurring Possible cause Possible solution Luminaire was recently installed but cannot be switched on 230 V ± 10 % Power reset Faulty circuit-breaker/mains fuse After checking. overvoltages (400 V) may have occurred. – N conductor has been confused with L conductor – directly earthed conductor interrupted – unbalanced load Visually check electronic ballasts if there are any burn marks at mains input. perhaps install new circuit-breaker/fuse Faulty cable leading to luminaire Measure voltage at luminaire terminal Fix wiring at input end Ballast power down Use mains fuse to briefly switch off luminaire power. Chapter 8 / 29 . then switch on again Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires With 3~ through-wiring in particular. Replace all units affected. all lamps have to be replaced (make voltage reset) Wrong lamp Check compatibility with ballast. In multi-lamp luminaires.Error occurring Power reset Possible cause Possible solution Note Checked ✓ Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires 30 / Chapter 8 Luminaire worked but suddenly cannot be switched on again No re-ignition after lamp replacement Use mains fuse to briefly switch off luminaire power. Fit new lamp/s if cause has been confirmed. Details on ballast label must conform with details printed on lamp Faulty lampholder contact Check by rotating lamp several times to left and right (approx. then switch on again Faulty lamp Check cause: replace lamp/s for working lamp/s from adjacent luminaire. 180°) The Lighting Handbook . B2 or Dali) (disconnect line). Use mains fuse to briefly switch off power. Power reset with bus signal Ballast power down in switchdim installations Use mains fuse to briefly switch off power. Then reconnect bus line and try to switch luminaire via control gear installed (LM or Dali). Actuate momentary-action switch at switchdim input (switching on/off) Ballast power down in LM and/or DALI bus installations Intermit signal in bus line (B1. Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires Problems with signal line and/or bus line (faulty bus) Measure power at bus Specified values: DALI: 9 to 15 V = LM: 13 to 15 V = DSI: no power measured Chapter 8 / 31 .The Lighting Handbook 2. Additional tests for luminaires with dimmable electronic ballast: Note Power reset with switchdim Checked ✓ Error occurring Possible cause Possible solution Dimmable luminaire already worked but suddenly cannot be switched on again. No contact in lampholder thread – screw-fasten lamp as deeply as possible – between lamp solder point and cap tab – remove oxidation from lamp solder point. luminaire does not work any more. Additional test for HID luminaires (high-pressure lamps such as HIT. if necessary.3. etc.): Note Checked ✓ Error occurring Possible cause Possible solution Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires 32 / Chapter 8 After relamping. HST. The Lighting Handbook . Analysis of partial function of luminaires with electronic ballast (bad lighting quality of fluorescent lamp): Note Checked ✓ Error occurring Possible cause Possible solution Lamp start delayed No earth connection in luminaires with protection class 1 Connect luminaire earth Bad dimming quality Bad earth connection Use high-resistance voltmeter to measure power between phase and earth.g. new lamps should always be operated at 100% for the first 100 hours of operation . Too low temperatures outside.The Lighting Handbook 4. air-conditioning system) Cool Spot Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires Cool spot neglected Do not operate lamps in positions unprovided for Chapter 8 / 33 Increasing migration of dark spots along fluorescent lamp In order to achieve an appropriate lighting quality. and between neutral conductor and earth Poor luminous efficiency/dimming behaviour Ambient temperature of lamp too low/too high Check for heat buildup underneath high Common ceilings or at workplaces with very high temperature range: temperatures. –15 °C < T < 35 °C or heavy air flow (e. . . . . . 9 – 10 ZUMTOBEL Lighting DVD . . . . . . 7 CAD data in 2D and 3D available online . . . . 5 Online product information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 VIVALDI – Composing light . . . 8 Online lighting design tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ELI-LENI Calculator . . . . . . 6 – 8 Product data sheets and installation instructions available online . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Chapter 9 Services Design process and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FluxCalc. trade fairs. roadshows. Light Forums ELI-LENI calculator Research projects. DIALux. efficiency analysis. define requirements Blueprint planning Work out a concept Optimise Detailed planning Calculation Documentation Implementation Testing Maintenance Requirement Design Implementation Design tools: Communication Product catalogue. events. ads and press work. Relux. brochures. system configurators. congresses. LM Energy VIVALDI visualisation. studies VIVALDI reference Library Online catalogue. ELI-LENI calculator.Design process and tools Design process: Communication Attention to/awareness of concepts and products Determine basic situation. QuickCalc. maintenance factor calculation. VIVALDI optimising Requirement Design Implementation The Lighting Handbook Chapter 9 / 3 . com/humanergybalance 4 / Chapter 9 The Lighting Handbook . visual comfort. The five descriptive quality criteria of any lighting solution (visual performance.zumtobel. Further information and downloads at: www.ELI-LENI calculator Award your lighting solution a quality seal. vista. vitality and empowerment) are evaluated within only a few minutes by means of a questionnaire (ELI). The ELI-LENI calculator calculates energy consumption in a straightforward manner based on the provisions of EN 15193 (LENI). direction of light (directional. light quantity. diffuse) in room settings – Project source data available from standard lighting design software such as DIALux and Relux Further information and downloads at: www.zumtobel. – Optimised lighting solutions offering a balance between energy and ergonomics – Interactive visual preparation of scene-based lighting concepts – Dynamic visualisation of light including measurement of energy consumption as well as CO2 quantity – Supports the design process in combination with lighting control technologies such as LUXMATE EMOTION – Interactive visualisation of light colour and coloured light.com/vivaldi The Lighting Handbook Chapter 9 / 5 .VIVALDI – Composing light The innovative software for Humanergy Balance lighting concepts makes energy efficiency and lighting quality visible and measurable. Online product information Under the “Download” tab.zumtobel. IES – CAD data: 2D and 3D – Drag & drop data package for DIALux and Relux – Brochures – Installation instructions – CE certificates . the online catalogue provides a list of all product specifications available for a certain product.com/60710147 6 / Chapter 9 The Lighting Handbook Product information available: – Photometric data sheets inc. Quick access with URL/article reference: www. UGR tables and maintenance factors – Data formats Eulumdat. charts. up to date and country-specific: figures. – Complete product information in PDF format. all installation instructions for the respective product are available in PDF format. Additionally.Product data sheets and installation instructions available online Any product information required can be selected from the online catalogue and summarised in the form of a data sheet. images – Compilation of the product information selected in the form of a data sheet (ZIP file) – Photometric data sheets – Data sheets with connecting instructions for LUXMATE products – Quick dispatch of any part of the catalogue by e-mail The Lighting Handbook Chapter 9 / 7 . 3D Studio Max Just take a look at: www. 3D Studio Max etc. – Quick selection of the required symbol – 2D luminaire symbols for AutoCAD as library and in DXF format – 3D luminaires for various CAD systems – Special data sheets with connecting instructions for LUXMATE products – Available formats: DXF. e.zumtobel.CAD data in 2D and 3D available online The 2D and 3D data for ZUMTOBEL products can be downloaded free of charge in various formats. dxf.com/download 8 / Chapter 9 The Lighting Handbook .g. Rhino. Lightscape. Lightscape. Rhino. The Lighting Handbook Chapter 9 / 9 . In the ZUMTOBEL online catalogue. approximate determination of the number of luminaires required to achieve a defined illuminance level according to the light output ratio method – or vice versa: to determine the illuminance level of a defined number of luminaires.Online lighting design tools QuickCalc online: QuickCalc provides for a quick. QuickCalc is available under the “QuickCalc” tab for products with calculation data. the luminous flux of T16 and T26 lamps in relation to ambient temperature can be determined.FluxCalc online (calculation of luminous flux): Using FluxCalc. ZUMTOBEL Lighting DVD ZUMTOBEL data plug-in for DIALux and Relux with all available product data (Product Explorer – with QuickCalc and maintenance factor calculation). ELI/LENI calculator and VIVALDI demo version. 10 / Chapter 9 The Lighting Handbook . ZX2 configurator. For T16 lamps. updated versions of DIALux and Relux as well as further tools: LUXMATE Energy Light. FluxCalc also includes the influence of ZUMTOBEL’s “Cool Spot Optimizer” in the calculation. Personal Notes The Lighting Handbook Chapter 10 . Personal Notes Chapter 10 The Lighting Handbook . Personal Notes The Lighting Handbook Chapter 10 . Personal Notes Chapter 10 The Lighting Handbook . Personal Notes The Lighting Handbook Chapter 10 . 4th Floor.zumtobel.co.hk Sweden Zumtobel Belysning Birger Jarlsgatan 57 113 56 Stockholm T +46/(0)8/26 26 50 F +46/(0)8/26 56 05 M info.zumtobel.com.com.com. New York 1258-2630 PO Box 54620 Dubai T +1/(0)845/691 62 62 T +971/(4) 214 9845 F +1/(0)845/691 62 89 F +971/(4) 214 9501 www. 1 Xin Dong Road.com www.com www. T +852/(0)2503 0466 F +852/(0)2503 0177 M
[email protected] M info.zumtobel.United Kingdom Zumtobel Lighting Ltd. Location Highland Office 413 3300 Route 9W Highland.zumtobel. Kwai Chung. 223 Hing Fong Road.hk United Arab Emirates Zumtobel Lighting GmbH USA and Canada Dubai Airport Free Zone.au China Zumtobel Lighting China Beijing Office T5-2-152 Tayuan Diplomatic Compound No. Level 43. Pump Lane London Hayes/Middlesex UB3 3BL T +44/(0)20 8589 1800 F +44/(0)20 8756 4800 M enquiriesuk@zumtobel. Metroplaza.T.us www.
[email protected] Argent Centre. Unit 4 . Chaoyang District 100600 Beijing T +86/(10) 8532 3886 F +86/(10) 8532 3889 M admin@zumtobel. Zumtobel Lighting Inc.se@zumtobel. Tower 1.zumtobel.uk Hong Kong Zumtobel Lighting Hong Kong Unit 319.com www.ca Norway Zumtobel Belysning Australia and New Zealand Pilestredet 75 C Zumtobel Lighting Pty Ltd 0354 Oslo 333 Pacific Highway Postbox 5829 Majorstuen North Sydney.com. NSW 2060 0308 Oslo T +61/(2)8913 5000 T +47/22 46 85 00 F +61/(2)8913 5001 F +47/22 46 85 02 M
[email protected] . 3rd East Wing. Vlastislavova 11 Praha 4 140 00 Praha T +420/(2) 41 740 301 F +420/(2) 41 740 308 M
[email protected] www. Dunajska cesta 159 1000 Ljubljana T +386/(1) 56 09 820 F +386/(1) 56 09 866 M
[email protected] Russia Zumtobel Lighting GmbH Official Representative Office Skakovaya Str. No 1.r.o.com www.Denmark Light Makers AS Indiavej 1 2100 Copenhagen T +45/(0)35 43 70 00 F +45/(0)35 43 54 54 M ralf.si Headquarters Zumtobel Lighting GmbH Schweizer Strasse 30 Postfach 72 6851 Dornbirn.o.lightmakers.zumtobel. Office 1104 125040 Moscow T +7/(495) 945 36 33 F +7/(495) 945 16 94 www.o. AUSTRIA T +43/(0)5572/390-0 F +43/(0)5572/22 826 Zumtobel Licht GmbH Grevenmarschstrasse 74-78 32657 Lemgo. F +49/(0)5261/2 12-7777 www.zumtobel.cz Slovenia and Croatia Zumtobel Licht d. 17 Bld.zumtobel.de Przedstawicielstwo w Polsce ul.o.z.o. GERMANY T +49/(0)5261/2 12-0 Poland Zumtobel Lighting GmbH Sp.dk Czech Republic and Slovak Republic Zumtobel Lighting s.zumtobel.ritter@lightmakers. Narbutta 46/48 www.zumtobel.si www.zumtobel.com 02-541 Warszawa T +48/(22) 856 7431 F +48/(22) 856 7432 www.ru . Printed on environmentally-friendly chlorine-free paper. 04 797 525-UK 12/08 © Zumtobel Lighting GmbH Technical data was correct at time of going to press.-No.Art. Please contact your local sales office for further information. We reserve the right to make technical changes without notice. .